JP7108314B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention comprises display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Regarding possible gaming machines.

In the gaming machine, a variable display game is executed when a game ball passes (wins a prize) through a starting area (for example, a starting winning hole). In the variable display game, the variable display of the symbol objects is performed in various modes.
reference).

JP-A-2003-126438

However, in recent game machines, since the pattern object is made semi-transparent when the high-speed fluctuation display is performed, the player cannot understand in what manner the pattern object is variably displayed unless the display mode of the pattern object is devised. may become unrecognizable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to make it possible to easily recognize a variable display mode of a symbol object during a variable display game in a game machine.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a control means is provided for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of first symbol objects on a display device, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the player can In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the game, a transparent member formed in front of the game board so that the game board can be visually recognized, and a first game capable of emitting light disposed around the transparent member and a second game machine component arranged on the game board, wherein the variable display game comprises a preliminary motion display period for displaying a preliminary motion at the start of the variable display game; a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the fluctuation speed of the preliminary action display period, wherein the control means is capable of displaying a pending object corresponding to a starting memory as an execution right of the fluctuation display game; The first pattern object is variably displayed, and a second pattern object smaller than the first pattern object is variably displayed, and the size of the first pattern object during the preliminary action display period is increased during the high-speed variability display period. a moving direction of the first symbol object during the preliminary action display period is different from a predetermined direction during the high-speed fluctuation display period of the first symbol object, and the preliminary action display period and the high-speed fluctuation display period are different. In both cases, the variable display by the second symbol object is displayed , and furthermore, it is possible to display an effect according to the operation of the first game machine component, and the first game machine component is manually , the light emitting unit can be in a specific mode after the manual operation, and the second game machine component is reflected in the transparent member. It is possible to avoid overlapping with the virtual image of the first gaming machine component by overlapping the virtual image of the element and manually operating the first gaming machine component .

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol object during the variable display game.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display; FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object during high-speed variation display and the frame; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect display editing process related to the large symbol object, the small symbol object, the reserved object, and the like. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation mode during the high-speed fluctuation display of a large pattern object (medium pattern). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object during high-speed variation display and the frame; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the retained object changes, where (a) shows a case where the amplitude of the fluctuation is large, (b) shows a case where the amplitude of the fluctuation is medium, and (c) shows a case where the amplitude of the fluctuation is small. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the variable display game. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object at the start of a variable display game; FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the variable display game, and the frame. FIG. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect) and the frame. FIG. It is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or a variation mode (modification) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (third modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (third modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the production|presentation button is reflected in a glass frame before and behind the movement of the production|presentation button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region which a player can visually recognize the virtual image of the production|presentation button reflected in the depths of a glass frame before and behind the movement of the production|presentation button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect button within the field of view of the player. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a region in which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the effect button is moved according to a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a region where a player can visually recognize a virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the effect button is moved according to a modification of the second embodiment; It is a figure explaining the movement aspect of the production|presentation button of the 2nd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement aspect of the production|presentation button of the 3rd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an area in which a production button is reflected in the glass frame and an area in which a player can visually recognize a virtual image of the production button reflected in the back of the glass frame in a fourth modification according to the second embodiment; It is a cross-sectional view of a projecting effect unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the projecting effect unit that enters the field of view of the player. It is a schematic side view of the game board, etc., according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion and the starting winning opening within the field of view of the player. It is an example of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs the variation display game as an effect|presentation.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes a performance device that performs lighting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game (game) or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
special game state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that provides the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game, and directly below it is a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory, and rotates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. , and changes to an open state in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or increases the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game by making the probability higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, the variable state (
Even in the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) will occur.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig. 3)
), there is provided a special variable winning device 39 having an attacker type open/close door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state of the large winning opening closed (blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby winning a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, predetermined game values (prize balls) are awarded to the player. A count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light-emitting member for illuminating the big winning opening is arranged in or near the big winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (
High probability state, specific game state) is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a variable probability big hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. While confirming to do, it transmits information (specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there was a V prize to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the V prize on the display device 4
1 and so on.

General winning port 35, starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 39
When a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning winning hole. In addition, normal variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, an out port 30 for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port
b is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D10, D18), start (hold) memory number of each variation display game Storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56),
have. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. special figure 2
The hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D8),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D9) which lights up when a time saving state occurs to inform the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the game machine 10 is powered on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D17) for displaying that the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing special variable winning device 39) is displayed. A section 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 is a lamp display unit (flash) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a pattern (fourth special pattern).
LED) and a lamp display unit (LED
). Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).
The lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (reservation) memory number of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the reservation number due to the occurrence of a big hit, but if it is not in the state of a big hit (reach described later on the display device 41 (including cases where is occurring), display the number of pending.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is sent through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 .

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Prizes are allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory, the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 indicator 52
Run the floating display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols). again,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display on the lamp display stops with "lighting" in the case of a loss, and "lighting out" in the case of a big hit.

Conversely, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) can be configured to stop at "lights off" in the case of a loss and "lights up" in the case of a big hit. . In addition, there is also a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display part, one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of a loss, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is energized, so that the special prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
In other words, the big winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, and during this time the player is given the privilege of being able to win a lot of game balls. be.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set as

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not executed at the same time. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure fluctuation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for detecting magnetism, and the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coils. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used to detect game balls. Also, the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10
A microswitch with a mechanical contact is used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided in the etc. and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided in the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. be able to.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small win probability (only when there is a small win), but other game conditions other than the probability (such as production) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. Setting key switch 93 and RAM
The initialization switch 112 constitutes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and the systems (types) of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the ready-to-win performance is set to increase in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Pattern random numbers (only if there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) A random number generation circuit for generation and an oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (
A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the original clock signal) and a clock for giving the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, a start opening 1 in the first start winning opening 36 It is connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. The high level supplied from the switch is 11
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as V and a low level of 7V and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
, detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to a specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning device 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (universal electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) for opening the special variable winning device 39, A second output port 134 is provided for outputting opening/closing data for the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86. As shown in FIG.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an open/close data signal for the large winning opening solenoid 39b and the like to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 A second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, Fifth output port 13
7 outputs to an external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.
A driver 138d is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. L selected sequentially with
A power supply voltage flows through the ED to light it up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls as the performance display.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can hold memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the 00 game microcomputer 111 extracts a random value for determining a hit in a normal game based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable state) is
It is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state.
In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
to a second variable display time that is shorter than the normal first variable display time (eg, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern stop time to display the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the first
A second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the time to convert longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so as not to open 7b (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed is entered. (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), a checksum for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, indicating that the RAM is abnormal.
Clear the abnormal flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-Probability setting confirmation process in A1037 (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is reported.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped ("E1
error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 so as to be displayed on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and in order to inform the external device of the RAM abnormality, the security signal ON data is sent to the external device. Output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. Then step A10
25 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”), and then (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
'), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
The result is "Y"), prohibits the interruption (A1038), and transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
041 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), step A10
47 is processed.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small hit design random number that determines the small hit design (small hit design initial value random number) (only if there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the general design Initial value (hit initial value random number), initial value of falling lottery random number used in falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number), etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as a start value (A1048),
Allow interrupts (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. there is however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same period (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, winning pattern random number, and falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. In other words, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 result is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, output for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big winning opening solenoid 39b) and driving control of LEDs (light emission control) Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), further random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1310
).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). If the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1315 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
, Special figure game processing for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312). Details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is the specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability set value area corresponding to the work set value The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
”), the value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs during setting change (A1037
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. note that,
The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, the special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is later mentioned in FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure, the processing during the special figure fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To set a fanfare command according to the type of the big win, set a fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big win for each big win, and perform processing during the fanfare/interval if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big win. Executes special figure display processing for setting necessary information etc. (A2610). For example, in special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a fanfare command and fanfare time is set, and processing number "3" related to fanfare/interval processing is set. and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, the necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big winning opening are set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the large winning opening open process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, the processing number "5" relating to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A2613). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the jackpot end processing to set the information necessary for executing the special figure normal processing (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number (jackpot pattern number) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state and the general electric support state after the jackpot state ( Time saving state) and other necessary information is set, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, electric support number) in the general electric support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state. ) information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2615), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2617), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting prize-winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and executes the starting prize-winning port 36.
(A2703). If there is no winning to the starting winning port 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A
If the result of step A2704 is "N"), the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), prepare the right-handed instruction notification command as the production command (A2705), and execute the production command setting process ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state In the case of hitting to the left), a hitting to the right instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 instructs to hit to the right (
warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no prize to the 2nd start prize gate (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents further generation of starting memories.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing in the start switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2912), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2
913). In the special figure reservation information determination process, the pre-reading stop symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol information based on the saved jackpot random numbers and jackpot random numbers, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (pre-reach variation number) And set the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation number (number of post-reach variation) as a production command. Then, prepare the decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2914), execute the production command setting process (A2915), and common the special figure starting opening switch End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3211 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3213), effect command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A32
The result of 11 is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215
), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (A3216), and clear the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
”), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3203
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
”), execute the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3208
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100)
If there is a second starting memory in the second starting memory, priority control means for executing the variable display game based on the second starting memory preferentially over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop design setting process, the stop design number at the time of loss or at the time of the big hit and the loss stop design pattern or the big hit stop design pattern corresponding to this stop design number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. In addition, it acquires and saves round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop design number and probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop design number.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
. Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
To save the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating to the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (A
The result of 3605 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A37
01). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3704) is not a big hit (A
If the result of 3705 is "N"), the process of setting the big hit flag 2 is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3605, A3704) will be described in detail. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A3807), and end the big hit judgment processing.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 802 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state (variable probability state) (A3803). Then, if it is in a high-probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"
), and sets the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value for low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, special figure information setting processing (A340
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A
4201), acquire the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
202). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (A4203)
, To acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop design pattern (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206
). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A
4207), acquire the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4
208). Next, set the second half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4209)
, Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop symbol pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212
), to end the special figure information setting process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, variation pattern setting processing (A
3406, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A430
1) Acquire the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare it (A4302), and load fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) , prepare (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not lost (result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed and step A
The processing of 4307 is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). after that,
Perform the allocation process (A4315), acquire the first half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, save it in the first half variation number area (A4316), and end the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores predetermined sorting values in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table.
In the second half fluctuation group table that defines only the second half fluctuation selection table that becomes "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is lost), there is no need for sorting, so the sorting value is "0" , that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of variation pattern random number 1) (A4404)
, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405
Calculate a new random number by subtracting the sorting value from the random number that has already been judged (A44
04), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, the above process is judged to be smaller than "0" (A4
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data address corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the head data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
One sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). to calculate a new random number (A45
04), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process moves to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505 of the above process, the new random number is set to "0
” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area for the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4
605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6), save the added value in the special game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during normal pattern fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the general/universal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22 .

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

Further, if the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 Setting of the open time and processing during the normal diagram display, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during the normal diagram per execution (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901).
. When the number of general patterns pending is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A7923), and the general pattern normal processing is terminated. Normal figure normal process transition setting process 1
Then, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "
N"), load the hit random number from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reserved number 1),
Load the hit pattern random number from the general pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902)
. And, the random number storage area per normal pattern (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per normal pattern (for the number of reservations 1
) is cleared to 0 (A7903). In addition, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, the time saving state (
(A7904). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7905
), if it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7906), step A7907 to process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is,
If not, the process proceeds to step A7909. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

The game control device 100 hits when the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a miss, save the miss information in the hit flag area (A7909)
. Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7910), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the win information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), the hit stop design number corresponding to the loaded hit design random number is set (A7913), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop design number is set. The stop design information is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A791
5) Save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, the general pattern command corresponding to the information related to the general pattern variation display game (especially the hit/loss information of the general pattern variation display game) is prepared as a production command (A7917), and the production command setting process is executed. (A7918). Then, shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7919),
After clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7920), update the number of normal map reservations by -1 (A7
921).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation (A7922),
Terminate normal normal processing. In the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal pattern fluctuation process, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is set. Save in the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 23
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). Effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clock means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when time information is read from RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on
When the time information is read from the C338, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC338. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and sound volume by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
”), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 24) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the performance control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, for example, there is a variation command (A3407). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot commands are commands for commanding operations related to the performance during the jackpot (display of fanfare screen, round screen, etc.). A round command (A2611) for commanding an interval screen, an interval command (A2612) for commanding an interval screen, an ending command (A2612) for commanding an ending screen
A2612), etc. Then, when the MODE part indicates a jackpot command (B1
The result of 207 is "Y"), the big hit system command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the pattern-based command (
B1209). The symbol system commands include, for example, decoration special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE part indicates a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the pattern-based command process is executed (B1210
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command (A2
913). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol command (B121
The result of 3 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). A look-ahead variation command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B1305 ). Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, if the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B130
7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the power failure restoration command 1046 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1030). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). and MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 26 .

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process executed by 0. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag indicating that the look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, the details of the look-ahead variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing executed by .0.

Production control device 300, first, look-ahead variation system command (look-ahead variation pattern command)
(B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), load the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area (B1711), and execute the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the look-ahead effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (B1715
result is "N"), the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of holds is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or if the generated prefetch effect is not an immediate start effect (B171
If the result of 5 is "N"), leave it as it is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a 4R probability variation jackpot design (4R-A1, design 1), a 4R normal jackpot design (4R-A2
, Pattern 2), 8R variable jackpot pattern (8R-A1, pattern 3), 8R normal jackpot pattern (8R-
A2, pattern 4), 12R probability variation jackpot pattern (12R-A1, pattern 5), 12R normal jackpot pattern (12R-A2, pattern 6).

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 30) described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of special figure type Acquire the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the variable command (variable command) M
The address of the first half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is reduced is set (B201
5). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). note that,
The fourth pattern variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning system command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the win-related command is a big win fanfare command (or a small win fanfare command if there is a small win), fanfare effect is set. A fanfare effect setting process is executed (B2102).
The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command (or if there is a small hit, the open command during the small hit), the effect control device 300 performs a round effect. Setting processing is executed, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to in-round (B2105, B2106), and the win-related command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the winning system command processing is terminated. (In addition, when there is a small win and the big winning opening is opened only once with the small win, that is, when the small win is one round, there is no interval command.)

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate an interval (B2107
result is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B21
10 result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an ending command (or a small win end screen command if there is a small win), the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. Execute the process, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P
(B2111, B2112), and set the game state flag indicating the machine state to "ending" (B2111, B2112)
Terminates hit command processing.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (B2
If the result of 110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the winning command process without executing any process.

[Variation mode or change mode of large pattern object, small pattern object, and reserved object]
FIG. 33 shows large pattern objects 610A and 61 during high-speed fluctuation display on the display device 41.
It is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of 0B, 610C, a small pattern object 615, and a reserved object 633, 633a. FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram (
later). FIG. 35 shows large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 6 during high-speed fluctuation display.
10C, a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the small pattern object 15 and the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the frame.

As shown in FIG. 33 (for example, (a1)), a variable display area 610 is displayed in the center of the display device 41.
is arranged, a large symbol object 610A (first large symbol object) is arranged on the left side of the variable display area 610, and a large symbol object 610B (
A first large symbol object) is arranged, and in the center of the variable display area 610, a large symbol object 610C (second large symbol object) is arranged. In (a1) of FIG. 33, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C all display "7" as identification information, but each can display arbitrary identification information (an integer from 1 to 9). . again,
The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are configured such that identification information (for example, "7") is written on the front or back surface of a rectangular plate-like main body. ) only.

In addition, at the lower part of the display device 41 and directly below the large pattern object 610C, a reserved digestion area 640 is arranged, and on the left side thereof, a reserved display portion 630a (special figure 1 reserved display portion)
are placed. In addition, the right side of the reserved digestion area 640 is a special figure 2 reserved display portion.
In the special figure 1 reserved display portion (reserved display portion 630a) and the special figure 2 reserved display portion, the reserved objects 633 before digestion are arranged in a row according to the number of reservations (up to 4 pieces), respectively. Area 640 displays pending objects 633a that are being digested. Suspended object 633a is a suspended display corresponding to the starting memory (suspended during variation) of the special figure variation display game being executed. In addition, the special figure 1 pending display unit displays the pending object 633 (holding display) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 pending, special figure 1 starting memory), and the special figure 2 pending display unit is the second Display the pending object 633 (holding display) corresponding to the starting memory (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 starting memory).

On the upper right of the display device 41 (on the right side of the large symbol object 610B), a special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 are arranged in order from the top. In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. . Therefore, two reserved objects 633 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display portion (reserved display portion 630a), and the reserved object 633 is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display portion.

In addition, the small pattern object 6
15 are placed. The small pattern objects 615 are, for example, Chinese numerals "one" to "nine".
Although only one is displayed in FIG. 33, for example, three small pattern objects 615 may be displayed in a horizontal row.

As noted above, pending digestion area 640 displays pending object 633a. Therefore, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300
A variable display game is executed as a (starting memory) is consumed.

In the variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) on the display device 41, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 are displayed in a variable manner.
In addition, the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be variably displayed in such a manner that the displayed form (shape, pattern, etc.) changes with time regardless of the execution of the variable display game, but they are variably displayed only during the variable display game. You may do so.

The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are variably displayed in the order of preparatory movement, low speed variation, medium speed variation, high speed variation, medium speed variation, low speed variation, and temporary stop variation in the variation display game. Also, large pattern objects 610A and 610B and large pattern object 610
In C, the variation mode (variation display mode) is different.

During the variable display game, the small symbol object 615 is synchronized with the update period (for example, 1/30 second, 33.3 ms) of the screen (frame) of the display device 41 (or synchronized with a cycle that is an integral multiple of the update period). The identification information from "one" to "nine" is sequentially switched.

The retained objects 633 and 633a are variably displayed (variably displayed) in such a manner that their shapes vibrate at a predetermined cycle.

In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) is the large symbol object 6
After moving 10A and 610B from the upper end (base end) of the specific route (here, a straight route along the vertical direction) toward the lower end (terminal end) of the specific route and disappearing, identification information (first identification information) , the large pattern objects 610A and 610B switched from the upper end (base end) to the lower end (end end)
large pattern objects 610A, 6
10B is vertically scrolled (scrolled). As the specific route, not only a straight route extending in the vertical direction but also various routes such as a straight route inclined in a predetermined direction, a curved route in an arc shape, and the like can be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) displays the large symbol object 610C in a manner in which the axis is rotated in stages, and the front side or the back side on which the identification information (second identification information) is displayed is The large pattern object 610 is displayed so that it is alternately viewed from the front, and the identification information (second identification information) is switched each time the front side and/or the back side is viewed from the front.
C is variably displayed.

The large pattern object 610C has, for example, a display mode that rotates in the axial direction so that the front side and the back side on which the identification information is displayed alternately appear at a predetermined position (center of the screen), and the front side or the back side is viewed from the front. Variation display is performed by rotational variation at which the identification information is switched (see FIG. 37(a)). The large pattern object 610C rotates in such a manner that the left portion of the rotation axis moves to the back side of the paper surface and the right portion moves to the front side of the paper surface, but it may be rotated in the opposite direction.

In low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the large pattern object 610C is variably displayed by rotation variation. The speed increases in the order of low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation. It should be noted that the variation speed of the small pattern object 615 is constant in low-speed variation, medium-speed variation, and high-speed variation.

Note that the preliminary operation is a display in which the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved by a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the vertical scroll direction before the low speed fluctuation is started. Further, the temporary stop variation is a variation display immediately before the end of the variation display game.
This is a variable display in which the display positions of 10B and 610C oscillate in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle.

[High-speed fluctuation display]
A variation mode (variation display mode) during high-speed variation display will be described. Here, variable display such as high-speed variable display is displayed by sequentially updating frames (screens). 33 and 34, for example, the case where the 101st (arbitrary number) to 125th (arbitrary number) frames are used will be described.

In the frame 101 shown in (a1) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41, each displaying the identification information "7". ing. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 with the identification information "7" viewed from the front. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven", and the reserved objects 633, 633
a is indicated by the most inflated form (shape "large") (Fig. 41).

In frame 102 (frame following frame 101) shown in (a2) of FIG.
The large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction. , respectively display the identification information "7", but they do not move in the horizontal direction compared to the frame 101 (the same applies hereinafter).

The large pattern object 610C is displayed at a predetermined position (center of the screen) in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees in the axial direction from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.
7" is displayed as a figure viewed obliquely. The direction of rotation of the shaft is such that the left side of the rotation axis moves to the back and the right side moves to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Also, the large pattern object 610C has not moved in the horizontal and vertical directions compared to the frame 101 (and so on). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "eight",
Reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain their forms (shape "large").

In frame 103 (frame following frame 102) shown in (a3) of FIG.
The large pattern object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41, each displaying identification information "7". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

Here, the large pattern object 610C can be made transparent except for the identification information. A graphic is displayed (FIG. 35). Also, the small pattern object 615 has the identification information "9".
is displayed, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large"). Although part of the large pattern object 610A is displayed hidden by the reserved object 633, conversely, part (or all) of the reserved object 633 is displayed in a manner hidden by the large pattern object 610A. (same hereafter).

In frame 104 (the frame following frame 103) shown in (a4) of FIG.
The large pattern objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information "7" disappear, and the display device 4
A large pattern object 610A displaying the identification information "8" is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and a large pattern object 610B displaying the identification information "8" is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the back side is viewed from the front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back side. there is Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In frame 105 (the frame following frame 104) shown in (a5) of FIG. 33,
The large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction. , respectively displaying the identification information "8". Large pattern object 6
In 10C, the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a figure is displayed in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "2", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In frame 106 (the frame following frame 105) shown in (a6) of FIG.
The large pattern object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41, each displaying identification information "8". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 120 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely. A figure is displayed. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "three", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In frame 107 (the frame following frame 106) shown in (a7) of FIG.
The large pattern objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information "8" disappear, and the display device 4
A large pattern object 610A displaying the identification information "9" is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and a large pattern object 610B displaying the identification information "9" is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. there is Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four". The retained objects 633 and 633a are switched from the most inflated form (shape "large") to a form contracted by one step (shape "medium") (FIG. 41).

In frame 108 (the frame following frame 107) shown in (a8) of FIG.
The large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, Each of them displays the identification information "9". Large pattern object 61
0C is displayed in a form in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and a figure is displayed in a form in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "five", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "medium").

In the frame 113 shown in (a9) of FIG. 34 (the frame after the frame 108 by five frames), the large pattern object 6 displaying the identification information "2" on the upper left side of the display device 41
10A is displayed, and a large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "2" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". The reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the one-step contracted form (shape "medium") to the two-step contracted form (shape "small") (FIG. 41).

In frame 119 (a frame six frames after frame 113) shown in (a10) of FIG. A large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "4" is displayed at the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface. In addition, the small pattern object 615
displays the identification information "7". Reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from shape "small" to shape "medium" (FIG. 41).

In frame 125 shown in (a11) of FIG. 34 (the frame after frame 119 by six frames), a large pattern object 610A displaying identification information "6" is displayed on the upper left side of display device 41, and the right side of display device 41 is displayed. A large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "6" is displayed at the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface. In addition, the small pattern object 615
displays the identification information "four". Reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from shape "medium" to shape "large" (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B move in the order of the top, center and bottom of the display device 41 while having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. is displayed. Further, in the large pattern object 610C, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed only in one frame. Further, the retained objects 633 and 633a change their shape every 6 frames, and return to their original shape at frame 125. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, a large pattern object 610A (FIG. 35: left pattern) and a large pattern object 610B (FIG. 35: right pattern) maintain the same identification information in three frames.
The display is such that the identification information is switched every three frames. Therefore, the large pattern object 61 having the same form as the switching cycle P1 of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B.
The display period T1 of 0A and 610B is the same and is 3 frames (100 ms).

The identification information of the large pattern object 610C (FIG. 35: medium pattern) is switched every three frames, but the display period T2 of the same identification information (identification information viewed from the front) is one frame (33.3 ms). .

Therefore, the switching period P1 of the large pattern object 610C is 3 frames (100 ms
), but the display period T2 of the large pattern object 610C of the same form is one frame (3
3.3 ms).

The identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched each time one frame is switched.
The display period S1 is the same for one frame (33.3 ms).

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed continuously for 6 frames in the shape of "large", the shape of "medium", and the shape of "small".
, in the order of "small", "medium", and "large", and this is repeated periodically. Therefore, the oscillation period P3 (the period at which the shape changes) of the retained objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms).
The display period H1 of a is six frames (200 ms).

In this embodiment, regarding the display period (continuous display period) of each object of the same form, the display period S1 of the small symbol object 615 = the display period T2 of the large symbol object 610C (
1 frame)<display period T1 (3 frames) of large pattern objects 610A and 610B<display period H1 (6 frames) of reserved objects 633 and 633a.

Here, since the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled and have a large amount of movement, it is easy to recognize that they are fluctuating. Also, since the large pattern objects 610A and 610B having the same identification information are vertically scrolled without changing their forms, it is possible to recognize that they are the same even if the amount of movement is large. Therefore, large pattern objects 610A and 610B
Even if is translucent, it is easy to recognize that the variable display is being performed by vertical scrolling.

On the other hand, the large pattern object 610C has a small amount of movement (zero) due to rotation fluctuation. but,
The switching period P1 for switching the identification information is the same for the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. The period (one frame) during which the same identification information is displayed in the large symbol object 610C is made shorter than the period (three frames) during which the same identification information is displayed in the large symbol objects 610A and 610B. Furthermore, in a frame in which the large pattern object 610C does not display the identification information when viewed from the front, the large pattern object 610C having a different shape from the large pattern object 610C in which the identification information is displayed (even if a figure imitating the identification information is displayed, may not be displayed) to display the large pattern object 610
The shape of C appears to change periodically. Therefore, the large pattern object 610C
Even if is translucent, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable display is being performed due to the rotation variation.

Also, the display period H1 (for 6 frames) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is made longer than the display period T1 (for 3 frames) of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B and the display period T2 (for 1 frame) of the large pattern object 610C. ing. As a result, the player naturally directs his/her line of sight to the fast moving direction, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during high-speed fluctuations. Also, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed holding objects 633, 633a.

As described above, the shaking period P3 (the period at which the shape changes) of the retained objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), which is longer than the game ball shooting period (600 ms) from the ball shooting device. ing. Here, the game ball is shot by the ball shooting device, and the player feels it through the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, the pending object 63
By making the swing period P3 (800 ms) of 3,633a slower than the firing period (600 ms), the player can relax and enjoy the game.

By the way, in the lamp display device 80, one of the two lamp display units (LED) at the bottom reports as the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the other LED is the special figure 2 variation display game. It is reported as the fourth pattern. The two LEDs are controlled by the effect control device 300, and one LED is turned on for 100 ms (100 ms on, 1
00 ms off: blinking at intervals of 200 ms), and the other LED is blinking at intervals of 100 ms even when performing a special figure 2 variable display game. Also, in the lamp display device 80, the upper left two LEDs (decorative special figure 1 reserved LED1, decorative special figure 1 reserved LED2) are in the off state,
Depending on the lighting state and flashing state, the decoration special figure 1 pending number (first start memory number) is displayed, and the upper right 2
The two LEDs (decorative special figure 2 reserved LED1, decorative special figure 2 reserved LED2) display the decorative special figure 2 reserved number (second start memory number) depending on the off state, lighting state, and blinking state. These pending (
The LED blinking interval for the number of holds) is also 100ms (100ms on, 100ms
off: period 200 ms). Therefore, it is also preferable to set the oscillation period P3 of the suspended objects 633 and 633a to a period corresponding to three frames (100 ms) or an integral multiple thereof. Thereby, the vibration of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the flashing of the fourth symbol can be associated with each other.

Also, as described above, in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 54 is the lamp D1
1 and D12, and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14.

When the number of reservations is 1, the lamp D11 or the lamp D12 lights up, the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 light up when the number of reservations is 2, and the lamp D11 or the lamp D11 when the number of reservations is 3. The lamp D12 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of reservations is 4, the lamps D11 and D12 blink.

Similarly, when the number of reservations is 1, the lamp D13 or the lamp D14
lights up, and when the number of reservations is 2, lamps D13 and D14 light up, when the number of reservations is 3, lamp D13 or lamp D14 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of reservations is 4 Lamp D13 and lamp D14 blink.

The game control device 100 controls the special figure 1 suspension indicator 54 and the special figure 2 suspension indicator 55, but the lamps D11-D14 are blinking at intervals of 128 ms (128 ms on, 128 ms off: cycle 256 ms). . Therefore, it is also preferable to set the shaking period P3 of the holding objects 633 and 633a to a period close to the blinking interval of 128 ms for the lamps D11 to D14, for example, a period of four frames (133 ms) or an integral multiple of this period. Thereby, the vibration of the holding objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the lamps D11-D14 can be associated with each other.

[Effect display editing process]
FIG. 36 shows large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C and small pattern object 6.
15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect display editing processing related to reserved objects 633, 633a and the like. Effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312), in the main process (FIG. 23), the image data including large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, and reserved objects 633, 633a are processed into one frame. (B0017) and displayed on the display device 41 (B0020). As a result, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a can be variably displayed (displayed as moving images) in units of one frame (33.3 ms units) in the variable display game.

At step B2501, the effect control device 300 generates a symbol layer. Here, the effect control device 300 allocates the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 to the symbol layer in order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44 and 47) for each frame. The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small pattern object 615 can be selected independently, and a pattern layer is created by overlapping these as layers. Each layer has common plane coordinates for display on the display device 41, and includes information on the form of each object (including identification information) and information on the position of each object on the plane coordinates (displacement from the origin of the plane coordinates). information).

At step B2502, the effect control device 300 generates an information display layer. In the information display layer, reserved objects 633 and 633a are arranged in order of use (FIG. 3) for each frame.
5, Figures 40, 44, and 47) are allocated to the information display layer, and are recognized by players such as special figure 1 reserved number display part 650, special figure 2 reserved number display part 660, right hitting display and left hitting display Information to be displayed is also assigned as appropriate. Note that the right-handed display and left-handed display suggest the shooting mode (right-handed or left-handed) to the player.

At step B2503, the effect control device 300 generates a background layer. The background layer is a layer in which a background displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41 is drawn.

In addition, at step B2504, the effect control device 300 generates a effect frame layer in which a predetermined effect image (effect image, etc.) is drawn.

At step B2505, the effect control device 300 generates image data by superimposing, for example, the background layer, the pattern layer, the information display layer, and the effect frame layer in this order, and sets this in the display frame buffer. As described above, the main processing (FIG. 23) is loop-processed with a period of 1/30 second. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can generate image data (frame) updated every 1/30 second and display it on the display device 41 .

[Rotation Mode of Large Pattern Object]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing how the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) fluctuates during high-speed fluctuation display. In FIG. 37(a), the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) is 1 as described above.
It has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the axis is rotated by 80 degrees. In FIG. 37(a), the large pattern object 610C changes the shape of the pattern so that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 180 degrees when three frames are switched. The VDP 312 stores reference objects (0 degrees and 180 degrees) stored in the image ROM 325.
degree) data of an inclined object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) may be generated by image processing, or a reference object (0 degrees or 180 degrees) and an inclined object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) may be generated by image processing. ) may be stored in the image ROM 325 in advance.

In addition, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 60 degrees from the front view (or back face) on which the identification information is displayed, the identification information "7" is displayed as a diagonally viewed figure. , the figure may be omitted. Furthermore, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 120 degrees from the front view (or back face), the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

Here, the large pattern object 610C has identification information (for example, "7") written on the front or back surface of a rectangular plate-like main body, but the main body itself is transparent except for the frame of the main body. (The same applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c) described later).

FIG. 37(b) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the large symbol object 610C (medium symbol) rotates 360 degrees. In FIG. 37(b), the large pattern object 610C changes the shape of the pattern in such a manner that it rotates 120 degrees when one frame is switched,
By switching 3 frames, it is possible to rotate the axis 360 degrees.

In addition, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 120 degrees from the front view (or back face) on which the identification information is displayed, the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and viewed obliquely. is displayed, but the figure may be omitted. Furthermore, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 240 degrees from the front view (or back face), the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

FIG. 37(c) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) rotates 180 degrees. In FIG. 37(c), the large pattern object 610C changes its pattern shape in such a manner that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched.
You can rotate the axis 180 degrees by switching frames.

Also, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 60 degrees from the obverse (or reverse) front view, the identification information "7" is displayed obliquely. A large pattern object 610C rotated 120 degrees from the
In , a figure is displayed in which the switched identification information "8" is viewed obliquely.

[First modification of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display fluctuate or change (first modification). . FIG. 39 shows large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, and reserved object 6 during high-speed fluctuation display.
FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (first modification) of 33,633a. FIG. 40 is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed fluctuation display and the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) and the frame. .

As a first modification of the high-speed fluctuation display, the effect control device 300 (display control means) sets the large symbol objects 610A and 610B (first large symbol objects) to identification information (first identification information).
A period of displaying a plurality of first large pattern objects 610A and 610B of the same form in a plurality of first large pattern objects 610A and 610B is displayed side by side along a straight line route (specific route) along the vertical direction in the order of switching. A plurality of first large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled) in the same state.

For example, as shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A has "
Large symbol object 610A (A1) with identification information of "3", large symbol object 610A (A2) with identification information of "2", large symbol object 610A (A3) with identification information of "1", forms an array of objects. Similarly, the large pattern object 610B is a large pattern object 610B (B1
), a large pattern object 610B (B2) with identification information of "4", and a large pattern object 610B (B3) with identification information of "3" form an object row.

Large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large pattern object 610B (
B1, B2, B3) are large pattern objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large pattern objects 610B (B1, B2, B
3) vertical scrolling can be displayed. For example, when the identification information is switched once, the identification information before the switching disappears in the large pattern object 610A (A3), and the identification information displayed before the switching of the large pattern object 610A (A2) is displayed. be. Further, in the large symbol object 610A (A2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed before switching by the large symbol object 610A (A1) is displayed. Also, in the large pattern object 610A (A1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Similarly, in the large pattern object 610B (B3), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large pattern object 610B (B2) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610B (B2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B1) before switching is displayed. Also, in the large pattern object 610B (B1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Therefore, the same identification information is scrolled from top to bottom each time the switching is repeated, and the identification numbers appearing on the large pattern object 610A (A1) and the large pattern object 610B (B1) are sequentially scrolled. When the identification information is displayed in the order of 1 to 9 by scrolling from top to bottom, the identification information is displayed in the order of 1 to 9.

In addition, the large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern object 61
0B (B1, B2, B3) has identification information displayed on a rectangular plate-like main body.
Although the scrolling of the identification information obtained by the above scrolling can be recognized, it may be difficult to recognize the scrolling of the main body.

Therefore, although omitted in the drawing, in the large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern object 610B (B1, B2, B3), by associating the color of the main body with the identification information, the main body It can be made to recognize that it is scrolling. for example,(
(1, red), (2, green), (3, blue), (4, red), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red), ( 8, green) and (9, blue), it is possible to recognize that the body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. In particular, according to the above association, the same color does not appear at two or more locations in the object row at the same time, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. Also, as another pattern, (1, green), (2, blue), (3, red), (4
, blue), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red), (8, blue), (9, green). That is, the large pattern object 610A (A1) and the large pattern object 610A (A2) have different color schemes, and the large pattern object 610A (A2) and the large pattern object 610A (A3) have different color schemes. Similarly, the large pattern object 610B (B1) and the large pattern object 610B (B2) have different color schemes, and the large pattern object 610B (B2) and the large pattern object 610B (B3)
have different color schemes. Note that (1, green) and (9, green) have the same color, but it is sufficient if the color scheme is different for at least the plurality of identification information 1 to 9 that circles. The first large pattern object and the last large pattern object corresponding to the identification information 9 may be made the same color to facilitate recognition of the round.

Therefore, large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large pattern object 6
10B (B1, B2, B3) in the specific route (vertical direction) in the order in which one round of identification information switches
It is preferable to arrange a plurality of large pattern objects 610A and 610B along the specific route so that the large pattern objects 610A and 610B that are adjacent to each other along the specific route and have colors associated with the identification information have different color schemes. That is, the identification information and the color information are associated so that the same color is not displayed continuously during scrolling. As a result, not only the identification information but also the large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern object 610B (B1, B2)
, B3) is scrolled by the player.

Description will be made according to (b1) to (b11) shown in FIGS. Since the transition modes of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the small symbol object 615 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the description thereof is omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "3" (A1), "2" (A2), and "1" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. , and the large pattern object 610B is "5" (B1), "4
' (B2) and '3' (B3). The object string of the large pattern object 610A and the object string of the large pattern object 610B may have different identification information strings as shown in the figure, or may have the same identification information string. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the identification information "7" viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in (b2) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B are displayed in the frame 10
The identification information indicated by 1 is maintained. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 103 shown in (b3) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B are each frame 10
1,102 to maintain identification information. Also, the large pattern object 610C is
The object body is displayed in a state rotated by 120 degrees, and the external shape of the identification information "7" is horizontally reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed.

In the frame 104 shown in (b4) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "4" (A1), "3" (A2), and "2" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large pattern object 610B is changed to "6" (B1), "5" in order from the top.
' (B2) and '4' (B3). Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 105 shown in (b5) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B are respectively frame 10
The identification information indicated in 4 is maintained. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 106 shown in (b6) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B are displayed in the frame 10
4,105 to maintain identification information. Also, the large pattern object 610C is
The object body is displayed in a state rotated by 120 degrees, and the shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in (b7) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "5" (A1), "4" (A2), and "3" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Switching, the large pattern object 610B is "7" (B1), "6
' (B2) and '5' (B3). Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "9" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 108 shown in (b8) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B are displayed in the frame 10
It maintains the identification information indicated by 7. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 113 shown in (b9) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "7" (A1), "6" (A2), and "5" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large pattern object 610B is changed to "9" (B1), "8
' (B2) and '7' (B3). Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the identification information switched to "2" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 119 shown in (b10) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is
It switches to an object row in which the identification information of "9" (A1), "8" (A2), "7" (A3) is arranged in order from the top, and the large pattern object 610B is "2" (B1), in order from the top. "
1” (B2) and “9” (B3) are arranged in an object row. again,
The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its identification information switched to "4" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 125 shown in (b11) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is
It switches to an object row in which the identification information of "2" (A1), "1" (A2), "9" (A3) is arranged in order from the top, and the large pattern object 610B is "4" (B1), in order from the top. "
3” (B2) and “2” (B3) are arranged in an object row. again,
The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its identification information switched to "6" and viewed from the front.

FIG. 40 summarizes the contents shown in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 38 and 39 in a table. As shown in FIG. 40, a large pattern object 610A (FIG. 40: left (A1, A2, A3)) and a large pattern object 610B (FIG. 40: right (B1, B2, B3)) are identically identified in three frames. maintain information. In addition, the large pattern object 610C (FIG. 40: middle) maintains the same identification information for one frame, but two frames are used to display a figure in which the identification information is rotated. there is Therefore, the period until the identification information is switched is the same for the large symbol object 610A, the large symbol object 610B, and the large symbol object 610C. As described above, the identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched for each frame.

Suspended objects 633 and 633a shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 transition according to "suspended A" in FIG. 40, the period during which the same form is displayed is 6 frames (200 ms), and the period in which the form changes is 24 frames. (800 ms). By the way, the production control device 30
0 performs a look-ahead effect (reserved change notice, etc.) for the reserved display (reserved objects 633, 633a) as described above (Fig. 28: B1712), for example, the higher the expectation of the big hit ) to produce an effect suggesting the degree of expectation.

For example, "suspended A" in FIG. 40 is a pre-reading announcement effect when the degree of expectation is "low", and the pending objects 633 and 633a are also displayed in white, for example. "Hold B" in FIG. 40 is, for example, a pre-reading announcement effect when the expectation level is "medium", and is displayed in blue, for example. In the case of "suspension B", the period during which the same form is displayed is 4 frames (133 ms), and the period in which the form changes is 16 frames (533 ms). "Holding C" in FIG.
For example, it is a pre-reading forewarning effect when the degree of expectation is "high", and is displayed in red, for example. and,
In the case of "suspension C", the period during which the same form is displayed is two frames (67 ms), and the period in which the form changes is eight frames (267 ms). Of course, the suspended objects 633 and 633a may change their forms each time one frame is switched. is 4
It becomes a frame (133 ms).

As described above, when "suspension A", "suspension B", and "suspension C" are used to represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, they can be used separately according to the degree of expectation related to each of the reservation objects 633, 633a. can.

Also, any one of the form changes (shape changes) of "suspension A", "suspension B", and "suspension C" may be applied to all the suspension objects 633, 633a.
During the probability change state, while the pseudo continuous effect is occurring, apply "suspension B" or "suspension C" to all the suspension objects 633, 633a, and when these are completed, all the suspension objects 63
"Hold A" may be applied to 3,633a. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the pseudo-variation of changing and temporarily stopping the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times in one variation display game.

Further, when there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, the morphological change of "suspension A" is applied to all the suspended objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variation, and all of them in the second pseudo-variation may be applied to the retained objects 633 and 633a of the third time, and to all the retained objects 633 and 633a in the third pseudo change. As described above, it is also preferable to appropriately change the cycle in which the forms of the suspended objects 633 and 633a change according to the game state.

41A and 41B are diagrams showing change modes (variation modes) of the retained objects 633 and 633a, where (a) shows a large amplitude of change (fluctuation), and (b) shows a medium amplitude of change (fluctuation). In one case, (c) shows the case where the amplitude of the change (fluctuation) is small. Note that, in this embodiment, the retained objects 633 and 633a change (change, transform) in width in one direction (width direction, horizontal direction).
However, it may be displayed to shrink or expand as a whole toward the center (in the radial direction).

As described above, the retained objects 633 and 633a can change the period of change in their form, but if the period is long and the amplitude of change is the same for short periods, it may give an unnatural impression. be. Therefore, in the case of "hold A", as shown in (a), a large amplitude is applied, and in the case of "hold B", a smaller amplitude than (a) is applied as shown in (b), and "
In the case of "suspended C", it is preferable to apply a smaller amplitude than (b) as shown in (c) so that the periodic changes of the suspended objects 633 and 633a are performed more naturally.

[Display Mode of Low-Speed Fluctuation Display at Start of Fluctuation Display Game]
FIG. 42 shows large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610 at the start of the variable display game.
C, a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the small pattern object 615 and the reserved objects 633 and 633a. FIG. 43 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a change or change when the variable display game starts. Figure 44 shows
FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game and the frame.

Here, large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C at the start of the variable display game
, the small pattern object 615 and the reserved objects 633 and 633a will be described.

The variable display game is started when the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved consumption area 640. FIG.

When the variable display game is started, the identification information of the small symbol object 615 is switched each time one frame is switched, as in the case of high-speed variation. Reserved objects 633 and 633a are
Regardless of the execution of the variable display game, the mode is switched every time 6 frames (4 frames, 2 frames, or 1 frame may be used) are switched.

On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C perform a preliminary action, and then shift to low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1). In the preliminary operation, the large symbol object 610C
, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C simultaneously move in the direction opposite to the scroll direction, i.e., upward, and then start vertical scrolling. and start rotation fluctuation. Also, during the preliminary operation, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C are displayed larger than normal (for example, during low speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, high speed fluctuation), and return to the original size when the preliminary operation is completed. It's like Furthermore, during the preliminary operation, the large pattern objects 610A, 6
The periods during which 10B and 610C respectively display the identification information are the same.

In frame 1 shown in (c1) of FIG. 42 , each reserved object 633 is moved to the right by the reserved shift, and the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640, and the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are displayed in the variable display area 610. is displayed in the center (initial position) in the height direction.

Here, the large pattern object 610A displays the identification information "2", the large pattern object 610B displays the identification information "4", and the large pattern object 610C displays the identification information "7". identification information may be displayed. In addition, in the same manner as described above, two pending objects 633 are displayed in the pending display unit 630a, the pending number "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 pending number display unit 650, and the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 , the number of reservations "0" is displayed.

Also, the form of the suspended object 633a is switched from the "medium" shape to the "large" shape at the start of the variable display game, but the timing of the start of the variable display game and the timing of switching the modes of the suspended objects 633 and 633a are the same. It doesn't have to be. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 7 shown in (c2) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610B
, 610C are moved from the initial position to a height position in the middle of the preliminary operation (for example, 300 pixels or 240 pixels in pixel units (pixels) of the display device 41). At this time, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be displayed (the same applies hereinafter) in such a manner that they move in steps of a predetermined interval (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) every frame. You may make it move for every frame. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "large" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 12 shown in (c3) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B, 610C, has moved to the highest position in the preliminary operation (eg, 550 pixels or 440 pixels higher than the initial position). Reserved object 633,6
33a maintains its form ("medium" shape). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "9".

In frame 13 shown in (c4) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B, 610C is one step from the highest position in preliminary operation (eg, 50 pixels,
or 40 pixels) is moved to a lower position. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "small" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 19 shown in (c5) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B, 610C, has moved seven steps (eg, 350 pixels, or 280 pixels) down from its highest position in the preliminary run. Reserved objects 633, 633a
, the form switches from shape "small" to shape "medium". Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 23 shown in (c6) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610
Both B and 610C have moved to their initial positions, thus completing the preliminary operation.
After that, the large pattern object 610C stops moving in the vertical direction from this frame 23 and starts the low-speed fluctuation display due to rotational fluctuation. Also, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B continue to move vertically, and start slow-moving display by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C return to their normal sizes. Reserved object 63
3, 633a maintains its morphology ("medium" shape). In addition, the small pattern object 615
displays the identification information "two".

In frame 25 shown in (c7) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B has moved to a position two steps lower than the initial position. Large pattern object 61
0C is displayed in a state in which the identification information "7" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "large" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

Here, the large pattern object 610C has a display mode in which it rotates 30 degrees per frame (Fig. 44: Rotation 1), and the identification information is rotated 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front. shall switch. Also, the large pattern object 610C displayed in (c7) represents a figure rotated by less than 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front, and the large pattern object 610C displayed in (c8) described later is assumed to be a figure rotated by an axis of less than 180 degrees. The pattern object 610C represents a figure that is axially rotated by 180 degrees or more and less than 360 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 31 shown in (c8) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B has moved to a position eight steps lower than the initial position. Large pattern object 61
0C is displayed in a form rotated 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front,
The shape of the identification information "7" is horizontally reversed, and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "large" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 35 shown in (c9) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B is displayed on the top row respectively. Then, the identification information of the large pattern object 610A switches from "2" to "3", and the identification information of the large pattern object 610B changes from "4" to "
5”. After this, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B move by two steps each time one frame is switched. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and "8" is viewed from the front. pending object 633,
633a maintains its form ("medium" shape). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "five".

In frame 37 shown in (c10) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B is displayed at a position four steps down from the top. Large pattern object 610
In C, the identification information "8" is displayed in a state rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "small" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 43 shown in (c11) of FIG. 43, the large pattern objects 610A, 61
0B has moved to a position five steps lower than the initial position. Large pattern object 6
In 10C, the identification information "8" is displayed in a form rotated 240 degrees from the front view posture, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and a figure is displayed as seen obliquely. . The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "small" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 47 shown in (c12) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B is displayed on the top row respectively. Then, the identification information of the large pattern object 610A switches from "3" to "4", and the identification information of the large pattern object 610B switches from "5" to "6". The large pattern object 610C rotates 360 axes from the posture of the frame 35, the identification information is switched to "9", and the "9" is displayed in a front view. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their forms (shape "medium"). again,
The small pattern object 615 displays identification information "eight".

After that, in the variable display game, the variable display shifts in the order of medium-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 2) (described later). Although it has been explained that the small pattern object 615 is variably displayed from frame 1, it may be variably displayed after frame 23, that is, after the preparatory operation is completed.

44 shows the number of frames in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 42 and 43, the large pattern object 610
Identification information and position of A (FIG. 44: left pattern) and 610B (FIG. 44: right pattern), identification information and position or rotation angle of large pattern object 610C (FIG. 44: middle pattern), reserved object 6
33, 633a and the identification information of the small pattern object 615 are shown in a table.

Here, the "position" (number of stages) in FIG. 44 is the position in the height direction on the display device 41,
0” indicates the initial position (center in the height direction). Also, "-1" is a position raised by one step from the initial position as a reference. Conversely, "+1" indicates a position lowered by one step from the initial position. Also, "rotation" means that the large pattern object 610C
is the rotation angle of the axis rotation, and as described later, "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", "rotation 4
There are 4 patterns. 42 and 43, "rotation 1" is applied.

As described above, the small pattern object 615 switches the identification information each time one frame is switched. Reserved objects 633 and 633a display the same form for 6 frames, and 24
The form is periodically changed using frames.

The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise from the initial position of the frame 1 by one step each time the frame is switched to reach the highest position in the frame 12, and then descend by one step each time the frame is switched. The preparatory operation is completed by returning to the initial position at frame 23 . At this time, the large pattern object 610C has not yet changed its rotation.

After frame 23, the slow variation (low speed variation 1) is started and the large symbol object 610A
, 610B continue to descend by one step each time the frame is switched to reach the lowest position in frame 34 . On the other hand, the large pattern object 610C starts to rotate 30 degrees each time the frame is switched, and rotates 330 degrees in the frame 34 . Here, it is preferable that the large pattern object 610C overshoots the initial position once and returns to the initial position, instead of stopping the height position at the initial position after the start of rotation fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, the frames 24 to 26 are lowered step by step, and then the frames 27 to 29 are raised step by step to return to the initial position. This makes it possible to enhance the sense of physicality of the large pattern object 610C.

In frame 35, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are 11
It is displayed at a higher position (top row), and the identification information is switched. Also, large pattern object 6
10C also rotates 360 degrees and the identification information is switched. After that, the large pattern object 610
As in the previous time, C is rotated by 30 degrees each time the frame is switched. On the other hand, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B descend by two steps each time the frame is switched.

In frame 46, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are 11
The large pattern object 610C is moved to a lower stage position (lowermost stage), and the large pattern object 610C is rotated by 330 degrees in the same manner as the previous time.

In frame 47, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are 11
It is displayed at a higher position (top row), and the identification information is switched. Also, large pattern object 6
10C also rotates 360 degrees and the identification information is switched. As a result, low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1
) and transition to medium speed fluctuation and high speed fluctuation.

In medium-speed variation, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled in 7 stages of -11, -7, -3, 0, +3, +7, +11 using the position of FIG. 44 as the first stage. , and as the second step, vertical scrolling may be performed in five steps of -11, -6, 0, +6, and +11. In high-speed variation, vertical scrolling may be performed in three stages of -11, 0, and +11.

Also, the large pattern object 610C is 0 degrees, 60 degrees, 1
Rotation is varied in 7 stages of 20 degrees, 180 degrees, 240 degrees, 270 degrees and 330 degrees, and in the second stage, rotation variation is performed in 5 stages of 0 degrees, 72 degrees, 144 degrees, 216 degrees and 288 degrees. , high-speed fluctuation, the rotational fluctuation may be performed in three steps of 0 degrees, 120 degrees, and 240 degrees (FIG. 37(b)).

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the low-speed fluctuation display is performed from frame 24 to frame 46, but the display period at this time is 23 frames (766 ms). The slow fluctuation display may be from frame 24 to frame 35. In this case, the display period of the slow fluctuation display is 1.
2 frames (400 ms). In addition, the display period of medium-speed fluctuation display (first stage) is 46
It is preferable to set the display period to 2 ms (14 frames) and the display period of medium speed fluctuation display (second stage) to 333 ms (10 frames). Furthermore, it is preferable to lengthen the display period of the high-speed fluctuation display according to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the preliminary operation is omitted, the low-speed fluctuation is started from frame 23 (the large symbol object 610C does not perform the overshoot operation), and the medium-speed fluctuation is omitted from frame 35 onward. It can be done if it shifts to high-speed fluctuation. Furthermore, the display time of the high-speed fluctuation may be shorter than that in the case of performing the fluctuation display game in the normal game state, and if there is no reach, it may be set to 9 frames (300 ms), for example.

By the way, at the time of low-speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation of the large symbol object 610C due to "rotation 1" expresses a state in which the large symbol object 610C always continues to rotate. but,
By applying “rotation 2”, “rotation 3” and “rotation 4” in FIG. 44, the large pattern object 610
The cycle of switching the identification information of C (360 cycles after the large pattern object 610C starts rotating)
It is possible to stop the large pattern object 610C for a while in a state where it is viewed from the front, without changing the cycle (period from rotating by degrees and stopping to starting to rotate next time).

When "rotation 2" in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a manner that it is rotated by 32.7 degrees (in FIG. 44, the decimal point is rounded off) each time the frame changes after frame 23. , the frame 34 is rotated 360 degrees to switch the identification information, and the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 35 also maintains the state of being viewed from the front. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for one frame (33.3 ms).

When "rotation 3" in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a manner that it rotates 36 degrees every time the frame changes from frame 23 onwards, and rotates 36 degrees at frame 33.
As the identification information is switched by rotating the axis by 0 degrees, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 34
And the frame 35 also maintains the state in which it is viewed from the front. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for two frames (66.6 ms).

When "rotation 4" in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a manner that it rotates 45 degrees each time the frame changes from frame 23 onwards, and rotates 36 degrees in frame 31.
As the identification information is switched by rotating the axis by 0 degrees, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 31
to the frame 35, the front view state is maintained. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for four frames (133 ms).

The effect control device 300, for the large symbol object 610C, "rotation 1" (expectation: small), according to the expectation of the big hit of the variable display game being executed or the holding object 633a.
Rotation fluctuations related to “rotation 2” (expectation: medium), “rotation 3” (expectation: high), and “rotation 4” (expectation: extra-large) may be applied. Also, the size of the large pattern object 610C may be changed according to the manner of rotation. : large)<"rotation 4" (expectation: extra large) may be displayed in order of size. At that time, the identification information may also be displayed so that it is larger than the reference size (for example, the size for "rotation 1") when the image is viewed from the front.

In addition, the production control device 300 applies "rotation 1" to the large symbol object 610C, for example, in the initial state (normal game state), and "rotation 2" during the reach, the variable probability state, and the pseudo continuous production. , “rotation 3” or “rotation 4” may be applied. Furthermore, the effect control device 300, when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the large symbol object 610C
, "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" may be applied in the order of repeating the pseudo-variation.

[Display Mode of Low-Speed Fluctuation Display at End of Fluctuation Display Game]
FIG. 45 shows a large symbol object 610 at the end of the variable display game (or freeze effect)
A, 610B, 610C, small pattern object 615, reserved objects 633, 633
FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a. FIG. 46 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a change or change when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). be. FIG. 47 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the pending objects 633, 633a and the frame when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). is.

Here, large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C before the end of the variable display game
, the small pattern object 615 and the reserved objects 633 and 633a will be described.

Variation display Low-speed variation at the end of the game (low-speed variation 2), high-speed variation, medium-speed variation (second stage,
It is implemented after going through the first stage order). In the slow fluctuation, the large symbol object 610C
is facing the identification information from the front.
0B and 610C perform a so-called shaking fluctuation (temporary stop display) in which 0B and 610C move up and down in the scroll direction.

When the identification information is switched, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost position (-11) as described above, and at this time, the large pattern object 610C is also displayed with the identification information viewed from the front. However, the variable display of the large symbol object 610C may be temporarily stopped until the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are scrolled downward to reach the same height as the large symbol object 610C.

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are, unlike the above, circular flat characters, and are displayed in a display mode that rotates about the same axis as the large symbol object 610C while maintaining the same shape regardless of the execution of the variable display game. shall be prepared. In addition, the small design object 6
15 switches the identification information each time one frame is switched until the variable display ends. Also, in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. ing.

In the frame 301 shown in (d1) of FIG. 45, the large pattern object 610A and the large pattern object 610B display the same identification information "3".
It has moved to the same height as C (FIG. 47: position “0” (same height position as position “0” in FIG. 44)). The large pattern object 610C is also displayed with the identification information "3" viewed from the front. Both of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed with the character viewed from the front. The small pattern object 615 displays, for example, the identification information "one".

In frame 307 shown in (d2) of FIG. 45, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 301 (for example, 25 pixels or 20 pixels per step), and the lowest step in shaking fluctuation (Fig. 47: Position "+6").

The retained objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by rotating the axis 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a mode viewed from the end face direction. Here, the rotation direction may be such that the left side of the rotation axis faces the back and the right side faces the front, or the rotation may be reversed. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 313 shown in (d3) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3", move up by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 307, and move to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0") where the shaking fluctuation is started. The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 307 (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) to rotate the axis 90 degrees, and the character is left-right reversed from (d1) (character is viewed from the back). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 319 shown in (d4) of FIG. 45, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 313, and move to the highest position (FIG. 47: position "-6") in shaking fluctuation. The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: FIG. 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, thereby rotating the axes 90 degrees and displaying the character as seen from the end face direction. there is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 45, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and move down by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 325 to the initial position of shaking fluctuation (FIG. 47: position "0").
The reserved objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, thereby rotating the axis 90 degrees. As a result, the large pattern object 610C is rotated 360 degrees from the attitude of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a front view as in (d1). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and move down by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 325 to the lowest step (FIG. 47: position "+6") in shaking fluctuation. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by rotating the axis 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a state viewed from the end face direction. . The small pattern object 615 has identification information "four".
is displayed.

In frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 45, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3", move up by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 331, and move to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0") where the shaking fluctuation is started. The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 331 (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) to rotate the axis 90 degrees, and the character is horizontally reversed from (d5) (character is viewed from the back). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 45, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 337, and move to the highest position (FIG. 47: position "-6") in shaking fluctuation. The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, so that they are rotated 90 degrees, and the character is displayed in a state viewed from the end face direction. there is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 46, large pattern objects 610A and 61
0B and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step each time one frame is switched from frame 325, and the shaking fluctuation ends by moving to the initial position of shaking fluctuation (Fig. 47: position "0"). do. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 343, thereby rotating the axis 90 degrees. As a result, the large pattern object 610A is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 325, and is displayed in a state in which the character is viewed from the front. Also, at this time, if the variable display game ends, the pending object 633a disappears. Small pattern object 61
5 displays the identification information "four", and when the shaking fluctuation stops, the fluctuation display of the small symbol object 615 also ends. For example, from frame 349 to frame 354 is frame 3
After maintaining the contents of 49, a big hit fanfare effect (FIG. 32: B2102) is performed.

In (d10) of FIG. 46, the identification information "333" at the time of the big win and the character information "Congratulations on the big win" are displayed. In addition, when (d1) to (d9) in FIG. 46 are freeze effects, after that, the suspended object 633a does not disappear and the scroll fluctuation or rotation fluctuation resumes, or the suspended object 633a disappears and the next Switch to a variable display game. During the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period), the large symbol objects 610A and 610
The periods during which B and 610C respectively display the identification information are the same.

FIG. 47 shows frame numbers, positions of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C (FIG. 47: large pattern), and reserved objects 633 and 6 in the screen transition diagrams of FIGS.
33a and the identification information of the small pattern object 615 are shown in a table.

46 and 47, the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (the above-mentioned stop display time) are omitted, but the effect control device 300 performs the preliminary operation display shown in FIG. , the sizes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C may be displayed to be larger than those during the high-speed fluctuation display period. As a result, attention can be raised to the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (stop display time), and the high-speed fluctuation display is shifted to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variable display modes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily recognized.

As shown in FIG. 47, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C start swinging at frame 301 and make one round trip at frame 325. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the shaking period of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is 24 frames. In addition, the retained objects 633 and 633a (rotated by "rotation 1") are also rotated 360 degrees in the frame 325 with the frame 301 as the reference. Therefore, pending objects 633, 633
The rotation period of a is also 24 frames (800 ms). In addition, the small pattern object 615
(Fig. 47: small pattern), the identification information is switched each time one frame is switched, but frame 3
When the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is stopped at 49, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is also terminated.

Other rotation modes are also applicable to the reserved objects 633 and 633a.
For example, when "rotation 2" in FIG. 47 is applied, by displaying a mode in which the axis rotates 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched, It can be rotated on its axis.

Further, the holding objects 633 and 633a can be displayed in a display mode in which the rotation of the axis is stopped for a predetermined time while the character is viewed from the front. For example, when "rotation 3" is applied, the character is rotated by 18 degrees each time one frame is switched based on the state in which the character is viewed from the front in the frame 301, and rotated by 360 degrees in the frame 321 to make the character to be viewed from the front again. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 322-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for four frames (133 ms) of frames 321-324.

In addition, when "rotation 3" is applied, the character is rotated 30 degrees each time the frame is switched based on the state in which the character is viewed from the front in frame 301, and the character is rotated 360 degrees in frame 313 to display the character viewed from the front. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 314-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for 12 frames (400 ms) from frames 313 to 324. FIG.

Here, for example, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" are stored in the holding objects 633, 6
33a can be applied as a representation of the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure variation display game, and "rotation 1" (low expectation), "rotation 3" (medium expectation), "rotation 4" ( high expectations). Of course, in the same manner as described above, the reserved object 6
33, 633a may vary in color. Also, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be used separately according to the degree of expectation for each of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In addition, it is also preferable to display the retained objects 633 and 633a in a larger size as the ratio of the time for which the retained objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front is larger. Size of reserved objects 633, 633a at "rotation 3"< size of reserved objects 633, 6 at "rotation 4"
The size of 33a may be displayed. In addition, pending objects 633, 63
The size of 3a is displayed so as to be larger than the reference size (for example, the size of the retained objects 633 and 633a at "rotation 1") only when the characters of the retained objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front. You may

Also, for example, either "rotation 3" or "rotation 4"
33a, for example, during the reach, during the variable probability state, during the pseudo-continuous effect generation, apply the "rotation 3" or "rotation 4" to all the pending objects 633, 633a, these When finished, "rotation 1" may be applied to all pending objects 633, 633a.

Further, when there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, "rotation 1" is applied to all the suspended objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variation, and all suspended objects in the second pseudo-variation "Rotation 3" may be applied to 633, 633a, and "Rotation 4" may be applied to all of the pending objects 633, 633a in the third pseudo-variation. As described above, the time during which the character of the suspended object 633, 633a is viewed from the front according to the game state, that is, the time from when the suspended object 633, 633a starts rotating until the character stops in the front view and starts rotating again It is also preferable to appropriately change the proportion of time for which the character is made to look straight ahead. In addition, reserved objects 633 and 633a
For example, the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a to which "rotation 1" is applied<the reserved objects 633 and 633a to which "rotation 3" is applied<the reserved objects 633 and 633a to which "rotation 4" is applied is displayed larger in this order. may

In FIG. 47, one cycle from "rotation 1" to "rotation 4" may be controlled in the same time (48 frames). Note that the effect control device 300 can manage the 48 frames by associating them with the control pointers 0-47. In this case, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", "rotation 4"
has a rotation mode that rotates twice in 48 frames, and "rotation 2" has a rotation mode that rotates once in 48 frames. As a result, even if the presentation control device 300 transitions the rotation mode of one of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at a predetermined timing (for example, transitions from “rotation 2” to “rotation 3”), the rotation after the transition is Starting from the same control pointer value as the other pending objects 633, 633a, all pending objects 633, 633a can be kept in rotational synchronization. In addition, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the retained objects 633 and 633a can be changed based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. can. Figure 47
Suppose that the retained object 633 is viewed from the front at the frame 301 of , and starts rotating from the frame 302 . At this time, "rotation 3'" is newly provided. The objects 633 and 633a can be rotated once to be viewed from the front, and the retained objects 633 and 633a can be stationary from the frame 341 to the frame 349. FIG. In addition, "rotation 4'" is newly provided. Objects 633, 633a rotate once and are viewed from the front, and from frame 326 to frame 349, retained objects 633, 6
It can be in a rotating mode in which 33a is stationary. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotational speed of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", and "rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period). twice the period). Therefore, the pending object 633,6
When the rotation mode (variable mode) of 33a is changed, the rotation mode of the reserved objects 633, 633a is changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" arbitrarily according to the game state, production stage, etc. Even so, the control for displaying the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

FIG. 48 shows a large symbol object 610 at the end of the variable display game (or freeze effect)
A, 610B, 610C, small pattern object 615, reserved objects 633, 633
It is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or a change mode (modification) of a. In FIG. 48, the suspended objects 633, 633a do not pivot themselves. However, the pending object 633
, 633a are the decoration objects 63 surrounding the reserved objects 633, 633a.
3b. 47, the decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position of the periphery (outer shape) of the character of the retained objects 633 and 633a in the frame 301 (frame 325). Each time the character is switched, the character rotates 15 degrees around the center of the character as the axis of rotation and moves along the periphery (outer shape) of the character. As the decoration object 633b, it is preferable to apply, for example, an object having a shape of the sun or a star and having a higher brightness than the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In FIG. 48, from (d5) to (d10) in FIGS. 45 and 46, a large pattern object 61
0A, 610B, 610C, small pattern object 615, reserved objects 633, 63
3a and the transition of the decorative object 633b, the description of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, etc. will be omitted as appropriate.

In the frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 48, pending objects 633, 633a
is stationary with the character viewed from the front, and does not move until the suspended object 633a is consumed. The decoration object 633b is the reserved object 633,
It is arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character 633a.

In the frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b rotates clockwise (or counterclockwise) along the periphery of the character in a manner that it rotates 15 degrees around the center of the character as the axis of rotation each time the frame is switched. ), and the position (
left cheek).

In a frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (chin) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (left cheek) associated with the frame 331. It is

In a frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (right cheek) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (chin) associated with the frame 337. It is

In a frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (head) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (right cheek) associated with the frame 337. , and the decoration object 633b has circumnavigated the periphery of the character. At this time, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have also undergone one period of swing variation with the frame 325 as a reference. After that, (d1
0), when the reserved object 633a disappears, the decoration object 633b decorating it also disappears.

Note that the reserved objects 633 and 633a also correspond to the decoration object 633b.
Similarly, "spin 2", "spin 3", and "spin 4" can be applied according to the game state.

When "rotation 2" is applied, the decorative object 633b rotates around the perimeter of the characters (holding objects 633 and 633a) at a cycle twice the shaking cycle.

When "rotation 3" is applied, the period from when the decoration object 633b starts to circle the periphery of the character to when it stops at the head of the character and starts to circle again is the period in which the decoration object 633b moves around the periphery of the character in "rotation 1". Although the period is the same as the period of rotation, the decoration object 633b stops at the character's head for four frames (133 ms).

When "rotation 4" is applied, the period from when the decoration object 633b starts rotating around the character's periphery to when it stops at the character's head and starts rotating again is "rotation 1" when the decoration object 633b moves around the character's periphery. Although the period is the same as that of the rotation, the decoration object 633b stops at the character's head for 12 frames (400 ms).

In addition, the size of the decoration object 633b is displayed larger in the order of, for example, the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 1" is applied<the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 3" is applied<the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 4" is applied. good too.

Although the decoration object 633b is arranged around the peripheries of the retained objects 633 and 633a and moves along the peripheries to rotate around the retained objects 633 and 633a, the decoration objects 633b are arranged inside or outside the peripheries. , and rotate in the same way.

Similar to the pending objects 633 and 633a described above, when the period of "rotation 2" in FIG.
The rotation mode (variable mode) of the decoration object 633b can be changed on the basis of the 60-degree rotation cycle. Let us consider the case where the decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character in the frame 301 of FIG. At this time, in “rotation 3′”, the decoration object 633b rotates 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character every frame, and in frame 340, the decoration object 633b rotates.
33b goes around the character and is arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character, and the decoration object 633b from frame 341 to frame 349 is stationary at the arranged position. In "rotation 4'", the decoration object 633b rotates 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character every frame, and in frame 325, the decoration object 633b rotates around the character. The decoration object 633b can be arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character, and the decoration object 633b from the frame 326 to the frame 349 can be set to a rotation mode in which it stands still at the arrangement position. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotational speed of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", and "rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period). 2
double cycle). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the decoration object 633b is changed, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b can be arbitrarily changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" according to the game state, production stage, etc. Even if the decoration object 63
3b can be easily controlled.

[Second Modification of Variation During High-Speed Variation Display]
FIG. 49 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (second modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display. . FIG. 50 shows large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, and reserved object 6 during high-speed fluctuation display.
FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (second modification) of 33,633a. In the second modification, a case will be described in which the length of time (the number of frames) during which the character is viewed from the front changes depending on the size of the retained objects 633 and 633a. In addition, Fig. 4
9. In FIG. 50, the case of high-speed fluctuation is taken as an example, but it can also be applied to the case of low-speed fluctuation.

The retained objects 633 and 633a are circular, flat-plate-shaped characters having a display mode that rotates about an axis, as in the cases shown in FIGS. When the characters of the pending objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front, the pending objects 633 and 633a are not updated for several frames in the rendering display editing process shown in FIG. A display mode is possible in which updating is resumed thereafter and the size is returned to the original size.

In frame 113 of (a9) of FIG. 49 (same timing as (a9) of FIG. 34),
The large pattern objects 610A and 610B each display the identification information "2" at the uppermost position, and the large pattern object 610C displays the identification information "2" at the central portion in a front view. Identification information may be different from each other in design objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. At this time, the held objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. (same hereafter).

In frame 119 of (a10) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "4" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a rotate 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched (Fig. 47:
Rotation 2) is displayed, and the character is displayed obliquely from the back side (positioned so that the left side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 113 by 45 degrees.
The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 125 of (a11) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B and 610C display the identification information "6" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a form in which the back side of the character is viewed from the front by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 119 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. Small pattern object 61
5 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 131 of (a12) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C each display identification information "8" at the same position as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the characters are viewed obliquely from the back side (arranged so that the right side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 125 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 137 of (a13) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A and 610
B and 610C display the identification information "1" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 125 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. Small pattern object 61
5 displays the identification information "seven". After this, the enlargement rendering of the pending objects 633 and 633a is started.

In frame 143 of (a14) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "3" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in an enlarged manner, and are rotated 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 137 as described above, so that the surface of the character can be seen obliquely (arranged so that the left side of the rotation axis is in front). It is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 149 of (a15) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "5" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in an enlarged manner, and are displayed in a state in which the character's surface is viewed from the front by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 143 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". Note that the pending object 633,
633a may be gradually expanded from the frame 137 to the frame 149 each time one frame is switched. Also, at the stage of the frame 138 , it may be displayed so as to have the same size (vertical size) as the suspended objects 633 and 633 a shown in the frame 149 .

In frame 155 of (a16) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C each display the identification information "7" at the same position as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a stop updating from the frame 149 and maintain the display of the front view of the character's surface. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 161 of (a17) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C each display the identification information "9" at the same position as above. Retained objects 633 and 633a continue to stop updating from frame 155 and maintain the display of the front view of the character's surface. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 167 of (a18) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "1" at the same positions as above. Retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (arranged so that the right side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by resuming updating from the frame 161 and rotating the posture displayed in the frame 161 by 45 degrees. ing. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 173 of (a19) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "3" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 167 by 45 degrees. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven". Reserved objects 633, 633a in frame 173
The enlargement effect of ends and returns to the original size. At that time, the size may be gradually reduced each time one frame is switched from the frame 161, or the same size (vertical size) may be maintained from the frames 161 to 172 and returned to the original size in the frame 173. You can put it back.

In frame 179 of (a20) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C display the identification information "5" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (arranged so that the left side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 173 by 45 degrees, but is enlarged. never The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

At the timing when the identification information of the large symbol object 610C is viewed from the front during high-speed fluctuation, the large symbol object 610C is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. 36, and then the update is resumed. It is also possible to perform a pause effect.
At that time, the size of the large symbol object 610C may be enlarged in proportion to the period (the number of frames) during which the large symbol object 610C is stopped, and may be returned to the original size after the pause effect is completed. In addition, in synchronization with the large design object 610C, the small design object 615
36, it is also possible to perform a pause effect in which the identification information is not updated for several frames.

In the second modification, the enlargement effect may not be performed on the pending object 633, and the enlargement effect may be performed only on the pending object 633a corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game being executed. At this time, the rectangular frame indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed so that the reserved object 633a protrudes from the frame without performing the enlargement effect. In addition, the reserved object 633 can be displayed not only in the special figure 1 reserved display portion 660 (the reserved display portion 630a) but also in the special figure 2 reserved display portion (the reserved display portion 630b). Therefore, if there is a reserved object 633 in the special figure 2 reserved display section, the reserved object 633 may be similarly enlarged. In this case, the reserved object 633a was the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 1 reserved display section and the reserved object 63 that was in the special figure 2 reserved display section
3, the enlargement effect may be performed for all of the reserved objects 633 and 633a. In addition, if the reserved object 633a is related to the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 1 reserved display unit, even in a configuration that performs an enlarged effect on the reserved object 633a and the reserved object displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display unit good. Similarly, if the reserved object 633a is related to the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 2 reserved display unit, the configuration that performs the enlargement production for the reserved object 633a and the reserved object displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display unit It's okay.

[Third modification of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 51 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display fluctuate or change (the third modification). . FIG. 52 shows large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, and reserved object 6 during high-speed fluctuation display.
11 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (third modification) of 33,633a. FIG.

In the third modification, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B rotate and fluctuate, and the large symbol object 610C fluctuates vertically, but this structure can also be applied to low-speed fluctuation display. (e1) to (e11) in FIGS. 51 and 52 correspond to (a1) to (a11) in FIGS.
3a and the small pattern object 615 are the same as the transition modes shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in (e1) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the upper central part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". Large pattern object 61
In 0A, the identification information "7" is displayed at the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction.
is displayed as viewed from the front. The large pattern object 610B displays the identification information "7" at the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, as viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in FIG. 51(e2), the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". not (same hereafter).

The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees in the axial direction from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and a figure in which the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely. is displayed. Here, the direction of rotation of the shaft is such that the left side of the rotation shaft moves to the back and the right side moves to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Note that the large pattern objects 610A and 610B have not moved in the horizontal and vertical directions compared to the frame 101 (the same applies hereinafter).

In the frame 103 shown in (e3) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central lower part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". Large pattern object 61
0A and 610B are displayed in a manner in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

In the frame 104 shown in (e4) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "7" disappears, and the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "8" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. be. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are each displayed in a state in which the back side is viewed from the front by rotating the entire object by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back side. it's shown.

In the frame 105 shown in (e5) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "8". Large pattern object 61
0A and 610B are displayed in a manner in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a figure in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely is displayed. .

In the frame 106 shown in (e6) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central lower part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "8". Large pattern object 61
0A and 610B are each displayed in a form in which the entire object is rotated 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely. A figure is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in (e7) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "8" disappears, and the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "9" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. be. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. is doing.

In the frame 108 shown in (e8) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "9". Large pattern object 610
A and 610B are displayed in a form in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and a figure in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely is displayed.

In the frame 113 shown in (e9) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "2" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. FIG. Large pattern object 610
A and 610B are displayed with the surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface.

In a frame 119 shown in (e10) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying identification information "4" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. FIG. Large pattern object 61
0A and 610B are displayed with the surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface.

In a frame 125 shown in (e11) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying identification information "6" is displayed in the upper central portion of the display device 41. FIG. Large pattern object 61
0A and 610B are displayed with the surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the large pattern object 610C moves in the order of upper center, center and lower center of the display device 41 while having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. is displayed. Also, in the large pattern objects 610A and 610B,
The same identification information (identification information for front view) is displayed only in one frame.

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the combination of the variation mode (variation display mode) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C according to the game state. For example, at the start of the normal game state, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are set to the vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C is set to the rotational variation. Large pattern object 610 when pseudo continuous effect occurs
It is also possible to change A, 610B to rotation variation and change large symbol object 610C to vertical scroll variation. In addition, in the case of pseudo-continuous production, a large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610
C) and a large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 61
0A, 610B) can be switched alternately.

In addition, it is also possible to change the combination of variation modes according to the expectation level of the special figure variation display game being executed and the big hit of the reserved object 633a. 610B to vertical scroll variation, large pattern object 610
Set C to rotational variation. When the degree of expectation is "medium", the large symbol object 610A (or 610B) is set to vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C and large symbol object 610B (or large symbol object 610A) are set to rotation variation. If the degree of expectation is "high", changes such as setting the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C to rotation variation are possible.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A and 610B.
, 610C to perform a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a game capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. In the machine 10, a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C
is a second large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second large pattern object (for example, large including a symbol object 610C),
In the variable display game, the large symbol object 610 is displayed more than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game
A, 610B, 610C include a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is fast, and the display control means (production control device 300) displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 61
Along with the variable display of 0B and 610C, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is performed, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C
) are displayed in succession in the same manner (T2) is shorter than the period (T1) in which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are displayed in succession in the same manner. The period (S1) in which the symbol object 615 is continuously displayed in the same manner is made equal to the period (T2) in which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610 during the variable display game
The change mode of C can be easily recognized, and interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300), under a predetermined condition (for example, when the production stage is changed or temporary stop of pseudo-continuous production), the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) and/or the number of displayed objects are exchanged.

As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced without adding a new performance element, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610
A, 610B) includes first identification information (identification information), and a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) includes second identification information (identification information), and display control means (effect control device 300 ) displays the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 61
0A, 610B) are variably displayed, and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is variably displayed in a variable display manner rotating at a predetermined position.

This makes it possible to easily recognize the variable display modes of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variable display game even if the variable displays with different variable display modes are performed at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in a stage-rotated manner, and the second identification information (identification information ) is displayed so that the front side or the back side is alternately viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification information) is switched every time the front side and / or the back side is viewed from the front. Objects (for example, large pattern object 610C) are variably displayed.

Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the second identification information (identification information) due to the rotational fluctuation.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) moves the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) from the base end of the specific route toward the terminal end of the specific route and disappears. After that, the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) whose first identification information (identification information) has been switched is moved from the base end toward the terminal end to disappear. Scroll the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B).

As a result, switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (one-way scrolling) can be easily grasped.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) displays a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) along a specific route in the order in which the first identification information (identification information) is switched. While displaying side by side, a plurality of first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) are displayed continuously in the same manner for the same period, and a plurality of first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects) objects 610A, 610B).

Accordingly, it is possible to easily grasp switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (one-way scrolling) in which a plurality of first identification information (identification information) are arranged at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the variable display game in the specific game state (for example, time saving state) in which the specific game can be executed after the end of the special game state is the variable display game in the normal game state in which the specific game cannot be executed. shorter than the display time of

As a result, the specific game state (for example, time-saving state) is reliably performed, and the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the specific game state can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A and 610B.
, 610C to perform a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a game capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. In the machine 10, a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C
is a second large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second large pattern object (for example, large In the display device 41, the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C while fluctuating display of the small pattern objects 615.
is performed, and the period during which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner in a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game, First large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A
, 610B) are set to be equal to the period during which they are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the second The period during which the large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) is displayed continuously in the same manner is the first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C).
10A, 610B) are displayed in the same manner continuously, and the period in which the small symbol object 615 is displayed continuously in the same manner is set to be the same as the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). equal to the period of continuous display in the mode.

With the above configuration, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610 during the variable display game
It becomes possible to easily recognize the variation mode of C, and the identification information of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) in a predetermined period By equalizing the switching cycles, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

In the first embodiment, the specific display period includes a high-speed variation display period in which the variation speed is faster than the predetermined period, the predetermined period includes a preliminary action display period for displaying a preliminary action at the start of the variable display game, First large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B
) includes first identification information (identification information) and a second large symbol object (for example,
The large symbol object 610C) includes second identification information (identification information), and the display control means (effect control device 300) controls the first large symbol object (for example,
Large pattern objects 610A, 610B) are variably displayed in a mode (vertical scrolling) in which the first identification information (identification information) is scrolled along a specific path provided on the screen of the display device 41, and the second large pattern object is displayed. (For example, a large pattern object 610C) is displayed in a manner that the axis is rotated step by step, and the front side and the back side on which the second identification information (identification information) is displayed are alternately displayed as viewed from the front, Each time the front side and/or the back side is viewed from the front, the second identification information (identification information) is variably displayed in a manner (rotational fluctuation), and during the preliminary operation display period, the first large pattern object (for example, a large pattern Objects 610A, 61
0B), while maintaining the first identification information (identification information), the display position of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) is changed to the first large pattern object (for example,
The first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B) is moved from the initial position of the first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B) in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction by a predetermined distance, and then the first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610A and 610B) Design objects 610A, 61
0B), and the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) is displayed while maintaining the second identification information (identification information). object 610C) from the initial position of the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A, 610B). After moving and then returning to the initial position of the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C), the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) is variably displayed.
A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are moved in synchronization with each other.

As a result, the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610
Even if B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) have different variable display modes, the same motion can be made in the preliminary motion, and the effect at the start of the variable display game can be performed naturally. can be done.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) includes first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and second large symbol objects (
For example, the size of the large symbol object 610C) during the preliminary operation display period is changed to display the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) at high speed. Make it larger than the size in the period.

As a result, attention can be drawn to the preliminary movement, and the sizes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the high-speed fluctuation display are made moderately smaller than those during the preliminary fluctuation to make them easily visible. , the scrolling can be easily recognized, thereby making it possible to easily recognize the variable display of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C. Also, in the high-speed fluctuation display, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610
By making the size of C smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation, it is possible to enhance the sense of scrolling speed.

Here, the size of the large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) is the same as the size of the identification information as it is for the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C).
C) Even if defined as the size, the overall size including the object body (frame, character, etc.) on which the identification information is displayed is the size of the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C). may be defined as Therefore, for example, even if the size of the identification information does not differ between the preliminary action display period and the high-speed fluctuation display period, the object body (frame, character) is displayed together with the identification information during the preliminary action display period, and the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. Even if the object body (frame, character) disappears during the period (and the slow fluctuation display period) and only the identification information is displayed, the size of the large pattern object during the preliminary action display period is larger than that during the high speed fluctuation display period. can be considered large.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) to the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object) immediately after the preliminary action display period ends. A mode in which the display position of the symbol object 610C converges to the initial position of the second large symbol object (eg, the large symbol object 610C) while oscillating around the initial position of the second large symbol object (eg, the large symbol object 610C). to change the display.

Thereby, the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) can be physically moved.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined period includes a temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) performed after the specific display period, and the display control means (effect control device 300) controls the first large symbol during the temporary stop display period. Objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and second
The display position of the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the display position of the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) are mutually different. The variable display is synchronously performed in a manner that periodically changes in the same direction.

As a result, it is possible to naturally suggest to the player that the game is temporarily stopped immediately before the end of the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). As a result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the starting memory is stored as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball into the starting area (for example, the starting prize winning port 36). Storable starting storage means (game control device 100) is provided, and a plurality of large pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 61
0B, 610C) are the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A,
610B) and a first large symbol object, such as large symbol objects 610A and 610B
), a second large pattern object with a different variation mode, for example, a large pattern object 610C)
The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) vary faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and display control means (effect The control device 300) causes the display device 41 to variably display a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C), variably display a small symbol object 615, and hold objects 633 and 633a corresponding to start memory. is displayed, and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner in the high-speed fluctuation display period (T2)
is shorter than the period (T1) during which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the period during which the small symbol objects 615 are continuously displayed in the same manner ( S1) is equal to the period (T2) during which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner, and the period during which the pending objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner ( H1) is made longer than the period (T1) during which the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner.

As a result, the player naturally directs his/her line of sight to the fast moving direction, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during high-speed fluctuations. Also, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed holding objects 633, 633a. As described above, the large symbol object 61 during the variable display game
Appropriate effects of 0A, 610B, and 610C can improve the amusement of the game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300)
33, 633a are variably displayed in such a manner that the forms of the retained objects 633, 633a change periodically, and the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are changed to Variable display is performed in a manner that changes periodically, and the period (P3) in which the form of the pending objects 633 and 633a changes is equal to the period in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change during the temporary stop ( synchronize).

As a result, it is possible to coordinate (synchronize) the variable display period (P3) of the holding objects 633, 633a with the fluctuation period of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C at the time of temporary stop, thereby improving the interest of the game. At the same time, unnaturalness caused by asynchronism can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300)
33, 633a are variably displayed in such a manner that the forms of the reserved objects 633, 633a change periodically, and the period in which the forms of the reserved objects 633, 633a change is displayed variably as a result of the game related to the reserved objects 633, 633a. can be shortened if there is a high expectation that is a special result.

Thereby, it is possible to visually grasp the difference in the degree of expectation of suspension related to the suspension objects 633 and 633a.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300)
33, 633a is reduced as the period of change of the form of the retained objects 633, 633a becomes shorter.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the unnatural relationship between the period and the amplitude in which the forms of the retained objects 633 and 633a change.

In the first embodiment, the pending objects 633 and 633a are the pending objects 63
The display control means (rendering control device 300) controls the period in which the forms of the suspended objects 633, 633a change. It is assumed that the period is the period of circling the outline of the objects 633 and 633a.

As a result, since it is not necessary to move the bodies (characters) of the pending objects 633 and 633a during the variable display, the variable display (variable display) of the pending objects 633 and 633a is performed.
can be easily performed.

In the first embodiment, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are the decoration object 63
3b, the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the suspended objects 633, 633a so as to rotate in a manner in which the position of the decoration object 633b rotates, and displays the period in which the forms of the suspended objects 633, 633a change. , is the cycle of the decoration object 633b.

As a result, since it is not necessary to move the bodies (characters) of the pending objects 633 and 633a in the variable display, the variable display (variable display) of the pending objects 633 and 633a is performed.
can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A and 610B.
, 610C to perform a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a game capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. In the machine 10, a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C
is a second large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second large pattern object (for example, large In the display device 41, the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C while fluctuating display of the small pattern objects 615.
is variably displayed, and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) can be variably displayed in a manner of axially rotating at a predetermined position (rotational variation), and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) can be displayed for a predetermined period in a state in which the identification information included in the
It can be changed based on the size of the large pattern object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In this way, by appropriately performing the effects of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variable display game, interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest which game state is occurring to the player without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) determines the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when the identification information is viewed from the front. It is made larger than the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when it is not possible.

Thereby, the identification information displayed on the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) can be emphasized.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) controls the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) after the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) starts to rotate. ), the second large design object (for example, large design object 610C) over a predetermined period of time
is paused, and the ratio of the predetermined period in the cycle from when the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) starts rotating to when the pause ends is determined by the second large pattern object (for example, It changes based on the size of the large pattern object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In addition, since the cycle of rotation of the axis of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) remains unchanged regardless of the predetermined period,
The period of the axis rotation of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) and the first
Synchronization with the scroll cycle of the large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is facilitated, and a more natural fluctuation display effect can be performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. is provided with start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the start area (start winning port 36, etc.) , the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the pending objects 633 and 633a corresponding to the starting memory on the display device 41, and rotates the pending objects 633 and 633a at a specific rotation angle (when the character is viewed from the front). or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized), and the suspended objects 633, 633a It can vary based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to the specific rotation angle of the retained objects 633 and 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized, etc.) can be improved. Further, the pause time can be changed according to the size of the pending objects 633, 633a. Therefore, the pending object 633
, 633a is no longer monotonous, and the player's attention can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300)
The size of 33, 633a is changed based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest which game state is occurring to the player without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41 to execute a variable display game, and during temporary stop, a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. large pattern objects 610A, 610
B and 610C are variably displayed in such a manner that the display positions of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change periodically, and the period from when the holding objects 633 and 633a start rotating to when the temporary stop ends is temporarily stopped. Sometimes large pattern objects 610A, 610
Synchronize with the cycle in which the display positions of B and 610C change.

As a result, the vibration of the display positions of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the rotation of the holding objects 633, 633a can be harmonized to produce a natural effect.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300)
33, 633a changes the ratio of the pause in the cycle from the start of the axial rotation to the end of the pause based on the size of the pending objects 633, 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to the specific rotation angle of the holding objects 633 and 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized, etc.) can be improved. can be enhanced. Also, the pending object 633,
Since the rotation cycle including the temporary stop of 633a is unchanged, the reserved objects 633, 63
Synchronization between the rotation cycle of 3a and the scroll cycle or rotation cycle of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C is facilitated, and a more natural rendering can be performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610A, 610A, 610A, 610A
Display control means (effect control device 30
0) and a ball shooting device for shooting game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle, and capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of a variable display game is a special result. , a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the start area (for example, the start winning opening 36), and a plurality of large symbol objects 610A. , 610B and 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example,
Large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) are different from the second large pattern object (
For example, a large symbol object 610C), and the variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and display control means (Production control device 300), in the display device 41, along with the variable display of a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C,
The small pattern object 615 is displayed in a variable manner, and the holding object 63 corresponding to the start memory
3, 633a are displayed on the display device 41, and the forms of the pending objects 633, 633a are variably displayed in a manner that periodically changes, and during the high-speed fluctuation display period, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is displayed. The period of continuous display in the same manner,
The period during which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner is shortened, and the period during which the small symbol objects 615 are continuously displayed in the same manner is set to the second large symbol. The period during which the object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner is equal to the period during which the reserved objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner. object 6
10A, 610B) are set to be longer than the period in which the objects 633, 610B) are continuously displayed in the same mode, and the cycle of changing the form of the retained objects 633, 633a is set to be longer than the game ball shooting cycle.

A game ball is shot by the ball shooting device, and the player feels it through the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, with the above configuration, by making the cycle (swaying cycle P3) in which the forms of the held objects 633 and 633a change slower than the firing cycle, the player can relax and enjoy the game. can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of pattern objects (for example, the large pattern 610
A, 610B) is variably displayed to play a variably display game (presentation control device 300
), and can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the symbol object (for example, the large symbol 610A (A1, A
2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) have identification information and display device 4
In the variable display game, the variable speed of the symbol object is faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game. Display control means (production control device 3
00) is a symbol object (for example, a large symbol 610A (A1
, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific path in the order in which the identification information of one round is switched, and the color associated with the identification information and the large pattern objects adjacent to each other are arranged. The pattern objects related to the identification information in a round are displayed such that the colors are different from each other.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the large pattern object (
For example, the player can easily recognize that the object bodies of large patterns 610A (A1, A2, A3) and 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are also being scrolled.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. In the gaming machine 10 that can generate the start area (for example, start winning port 36)
Equipped with start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the game ball, The objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) are displayed on the display device 41, and the reserved objects 633, 633 are displayed.
a, decoration object 633b) can be variably displayed in one of a plurality of different variable modes (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, and “rotation 4′”), and a plurality of are the same as each other.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the reserved objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the reserved objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is It is possible to arbitrarily change between a plurality of variable modes (rotation modes (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′”)) according to the game state, production stage, etc. Even if there is, control for displaying the reserved objects (the reserved objects 633, 633a and the decoration object 633b) can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, the variable display game includes a preliminary motion display period during which a preliminary motion is displayed at the start of the variable display game; A high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the fluctuation speed of the period (low-speed fluctuation 1, medium-speed fluctuation) immediately after the end of the preliminary action display, and the display control means (production control device 300) controls the symbol object (large symbol object 610A,
610B, 610C) are made larger during the preliminary operation display period than during the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary movement, and the size of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the high-speed fluctuation display is moderately smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation and enters the field of view. By making the scroll easier to recognize, this makes it easier to recognize the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C
) can be easily recognized. In addition, by making the size of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) smaller in the high-speed fluctuation display than in the preliminary fluctuation, the speed of scrolling can be enhanced.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of (1) becomes a special result, the variable display game starts from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game (low speed variation 1, medium speed variation). Also includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) fluctuate at a high speed, and the display control means (effect control device 300) performs temporary stop display or stop display at the end of the variable display game. The size of the pattern objects (including the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) is made larger than the size of the pattern objects during the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and the high speed fluctuation display to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period).
It is possible to easily recognize the changing display mode of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that shift to .

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, Large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) having a variable display mode different from that of the first pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A, 610B), and display control means (Effect control device 300) sets a period during which the second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner in a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. , first
The period during which the symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner is set equal to the period during which the symbol objects are displayed continuously in the same manner, and the specific display period (low-speed In the variable display period, medium speed variable display period, high speed variable display period), the period in which the second symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner is changed to the first symbol object (eg, large symbol object 6
10A, 610B) are shorter than the period of continuous display in the same manner.

With the above configuration, the symbol object (large symbol object 610A) during the variable display game
, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized, and identification of the first symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) in a predetermined period. By equalizing the switching period of information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the variable display, thereby improving interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, , large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and a second pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) having a different variable display mode from the first pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A and 610B), and display control Means (production control device 300) is the second
Design objects (for example, large design objects 610A and 610B) can be variably displayed in a state of rotating at a predetermined position, and the identification information included in the second design objects (for example, large design objects 610A and 610B) can be viewed from the front. It can be displayed for a predetermined period of time in a state where the
10A, 610B) are variable.

Thereby, the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be improved. In this way, by appropriately performing the effect of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) during the variable display game, the interest can be improved.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. display control means (effect control device 300
) are objects (holding objects 633, 633a, large symbol object 610C
(medium pattern)) is displayed on the display device 41, and the objects (holding objects 633, 633
a, Large pattern object 610C (medium pattern)) is rotated at a specific rotation angle (a rotation angle at which the character or the identification information is viewed from the front, or another rotation angle at which the characteristics of the character or the identification information are recognized). variably displayed in such a manner that the object is paused at a predetermined possible rotation angle, etc.), and the period during which the object is paused can be varied based on the size of the object.

As a result, the object (holding objects 633, 633a, large pattern object 610C (medium pattern)) can be rotated at a specific rotation angle (a rotation angle at which the character or identification information is viewed from the front, or another rotation angle such as the character or the identification information). It is possible to improve the visibility of an image related to a predetermined rotation angle, etc., at which characteristics of information can be recognized, and to change the pause time according to the size of the object. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the object is not monotonous, and the player's attention can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of pattern objects (for example, the large pattern 610
A, 610B) is variably displayed to play a variably display game (presentation control device 300
), and can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the symbol object (for example, the large symbol 610A (A1, A
2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) have identification information and display device 4
1 screen is variably displayed by a variable display mode scrolling along a specific route (vertical route), and the display control means (production control device 300) displays a pattern object (for example, a large pattern 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific path in the order in which the identification information of one cycle is switched, and are the color associated with the identification information and are adjacent to each other. , the pattern objects related to the round of the identification information are displayed such that they are colored differently from each other.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the large pattern object (
For example, the player can easily recognize that the object bodies of large patterns 610A (A1, A2, A3) and 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are also being scrolled.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. display control means (effect control device 300
) are objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b)
is displayed on the display device 41, and the objects (retained objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) are displayed in a plurality of different variable modes ((“rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or ("rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", "rotation 4'"
)), and the variable periods of the plurality of variable modes are the same.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative object 633b) is changed, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative object 633b) can be changed to a plurality of variable mode (rotation mode ((“rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or (“rotation 1
', 'Rotation 2', 'Rotation 3'', 'Rotation 4'')))))), even if it is changed arbitrarily according to the game state or the production stage. 6
33a, decoration object 633b) can be easily controlled.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). Display control means (effect control device 300) in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result
is the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) during the preparatory action display period in the display period after the preparatory action display period (for example, the high-speed fluctuation display period).
be larger than the size in

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary action, and the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is reduced in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) during the display period after the preliminary motion display period. By making the size moderately smaller than the size at the time of fluctuation to make it easier to see, the scrolling can be easily recognized, so that the fluctuation display of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized. . Further, in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) in the display period after the preliminary operation display period, the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is made smaller than the size during the preliminary variation, thereby speeding up the scrolling. can heighten your senses.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). Display control means (effect control device 300) in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of is a special result
determines the size of the symbol objects (including the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) temporarily stopped or stopped at the end of the variable display game during specific display periods (low-speed variable display period, medium-speed variable display period, The size of the pattern object is set to be larger than the size of the pattern object during the high-speed fluctuation display period).

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the attention to the temporary stop display period (shake fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and stop from the fluctuation display (low speed fluctuation display, medium speed fluctuation display, high speed fluctuation display) in the specific display period It is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that shift to the symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period).

[Second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 64. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the production button]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining a region where the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 before and after the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is moved, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a region where the player can visually recognize a virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected behind the glass frame 15 before and after the movement; 53 and 54 are schematic cross-sectional side views of a cross section including one life nail 36b (described later) viewed in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a game area 32 is provided between the glass frame 15 and the game board main body 30a of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. In the game area 32, for example, a start winning opening 36 attached to the game board main body 30a and a life nail 36b attached substantially above the starting winning opening 36 are arranged. The life nail 36b is a game ball that has fallen from the stage part 40b after rolling on the stage part 40b (see FIG. 2), or a windmill or road nail (starting prize opening 3
6 and the windmill), etc., to guide the game ball flowing down toward the starting winning opening 36 (obstructing nail, obstacle member, guide member). Normally, there are two life nails 36b, and the starting winning opening 36 is positioned just below the gap between the two life nails 36b. In addition, Fig. 5
3 and FIG. 54, etc., only one nail 36b is shown because the two nail 36b overlap each other in the drawings viewed from the lateral direction (left-right direction).

A plurality of LEDs 25c (for example, 3) are arranged inside the effect button 25 provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit (see FIG. 1) so as to be capable of emitting light according to the progress of the game.
25c is configured as part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4). Note that the LED 25c is
Full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs may be used, but full-color LEDs are desirable so as to enable various light emission modes. Also, the effect button 25 is arranged so as to be movable near the upper center of the upper plate unit. For example, the effect button 25 may have a sliding member fitted in a groove-shaped member extending substantially in the front-rear direction, and may move (slid) substantially in the front-rear direction along the groove-shaped member. An elastic member such as a spring may be attached to the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 may be configured to be held at the initial position (normal position) by the elastic member unless a force is applied.

Then, for example, when the LED 25c emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is emitted as direct light toward the surroundings including the eyes of the player.

On the other hand, part of the light from the effect button 25 emitted to the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) is reflected by the glass frame 15, and is reflected forward (toward the player side). Become. Note that this embodiment mainly deals with reflection by the cover glass 14 (transparent member) held by the glass frame 15 (transparent member holding frame). Also, as a transparent member,
Besides the cover glass 14, an acrylic plate or the like can also be used. The cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 is configured as a transparent member that allows the player to see the game board 30, but is completely transparent (
It is reflective because it has a predetermined reflectance instead of reflectance=0).

Light from the performance button 25 is reflected at various positions on the glass frame 15. - 特許庁In addition, the intensity (reflectance) of the reflected light depends on the incident angle from the effect button 25, and tends to gradually increase as the incident angle decreases. In this embodiment, the incident angle is defined as the angle between the incident direction and the surface (reflective surface) of the cover glass 14 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the effect button 25 is positioned at the initial position, the player pushes the life nail 36b from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face or head). A description will be given of the reflection of the effect button 25 when viewing the .

When the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 positioned at the initial position appears to overlap the life nail 36b, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. A virtual image is formed in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) at a position where the reflected light directed toward the area A of the reflected light emitted from the effect button 25 and reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) overlaps the life nail 36b. It's for the sake of being reflected. The virtual image of the production button 25 is the production button 25
The stronger the light emitted from the LED 25c, the more clearly (firmly and clearly) the image is reflected.

The virtual image of the effect button 25 is not limited to the case where the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light. Even in the case of being closed, it can be reflected in the glass frame 15 .

Further, as described above, when the incident angle (the angle between the incident direction and the surface of the cover glass 14) of the light emitted from the effect button 25 at the initial position with respect to the glass frame 15 is small, the intensity of the reflected light becomes strong. There is a strong tendency for the virtual image of the effect button 25 to be clearly reflected in the glass frame 15 at the position overlapping with 36b.

Subsequently, as shown in the position after movement in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect button 25 is pushed forward
53, the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15 increases, and the reflected light with attenuated intensity reaches the glass frame 15. Head to the area B which is forward and slightly upward (on the player's chest side).

As a result, the player moves the life nail 3 from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face and head).
6b, the virtual image of the production button 25 can be avoided from overlapping the life nail 36b.
Since the visibility of 6b is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (the chest side of the player), as indicated by the broken line in FIG. ga life nail 3
It appears to overlap with 6b. However, since the intensity of the reflected light is attenuated as the incident angle increases, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B, the deterioration of the visibility of the life nail 36b is suppressed. be able to. The player's eyes are normally in the area A, but may move to the area B if the player forcibly breaks his/her posture.

The movement of the effect button 25 can be performed manually by the player or by the control of the effect control device 300 . For example, the effect control device 300 can move the effect button 25 according to a predetermined condition (for example, when starting hitting to the right or returning from hitting to the left from hitting to the right) or according to the player's operation. It should be noted that the player may manually move the effect button 25 . Also, for example, in the normal game state, the left-handed hit is advantageous, so it returns from the right-handed hit to the left-handed state. Therefore, it becomes a right-handed state.

53 and 54, when viewed from area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the production button 25 is moved to avoid overlapping with the life nail 36b. was explained, but in order to avoid overlapping with the start winning opening 36, the effect button 25
may be moved.

Furthermore, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 is the life nail 36b and the start winning opening 3
6, but also when overlapping various board elements attached to the game board 30 (components or components of the game board 30, second game machine components), the effect button 25 is moved. good too. For example, as a board element that can overlap with the virtual image of the production button 25, the life nail 3
Obstacle nails other than 6b, stage portion 40b, warp passage 40e, normal map starting gate 34,
Special variable winning device 39 big winning device, normal variable winning device (second start winning device) 37, display screen of display device 41, LED of board decoration device 46, LED of batch display device 50 (especially pattern, hold, right LED indicating the hitting state), target position at the time of left hitting (target position, hit position, position where the game ball hits at the time of left hitting), LED of the lamp display device 80, and the like. In addition, on the board surface of the game board 30 (for example, the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the game area 32, the vicinity of the operation handle 24, the left side of the out port 30b, etc.), "unauthorized monitoring (mounting of magnetic / radio wave sensor, etc.)" and "spec When displaying information, suggestions, and alerts to players and hall clerks such as "display (display of probability of big hit and number of prize balls)" and "prevention of immersion", a virtual image of the production button 25 is displayed on the display part. The effect control device 300 can control the movement of the effect button 25 so as not to get stuck. In addition, even when the display screen of the display device 41 displays information, suggestions, and calls for attention to players and hall clerks, the effect control device 300 prevents the virtual image of the effect button 25 from appearing in the display on the display screen. Thus, the movement of the production button 25 can be controlled.

In addition, the object of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the life nail 36b etc. is not limited to the production button 25, but is installed in the projecting production unit 13 on the side of the frame, the upper part of the frame, the speaker 19, the upper plate unit, etc. Various frame elements (first gaming machine components) such as the LEDs and sub-liquid crystals of the frame decoration device 18 are also objects of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 . In this embodiment, the frame element is a component or component of the opening/closing frame including the glass frame 15 .

Further, a virtual image such as the effect button 25 is reflected not only on the glass frame 15 but also on glossy members such as the surface of the game board 30 and the surfaces of various decorative members. game board 3
The surface of 0 and the surfaces of various decorative members are, for example, metal-plated, film-coated, or made of a resin material, and can reflect light from the effect button 25 and the like. Further, for example, when the light guide plate is attached in front of the game board 30, the virtual image of the effect button 25 and the like can be reflected on the light guide plate as well.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may be controlled so that the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is at the initial position is lower than the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is operated (or during operation) (initial Emission intensity at position<emission intensity after movement (or during operation). In this way, by suppressing the luminous intensity when the effect button 25 is at the initial position, it is possible to reduce visibility degradation due to glare. Further, when the player manually moves the production button 25, the player can freely move the production button 25 according to the condition of the reflection, and the operation surface of the production button 25 can be changed by the player. (light emitted from the LED reaches the player directly), so that it is easy to observe the light emission mode such as rainbow color and red color. Therefore, when an operation suggesting image of the effect button 25 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 when the effect button 25 is operated, the player observes the effect button 25 that shines in the same color or light emission mode as the operation suggesting image, for example. It becomes easy to use, and operability and decorativeness can be improved.

Also, the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 returns to the initial position may be reversed from the above case, or the light emission intensity after the movement may be maintained (the light emission intensity when returning to the initial position≧the light emission intensity after the movement). (or during operation). In particular, when the operation of the effect button 25 is performed at the time of the big hit notification, the player can start the start winning opening 36 with the opening of the big winning opening of the special variable winning device 39.
It is easy to lose attention to Therefore, even if the visibility is lowered due to the reflection, the effect is reduced. Therefore, the effect control device 300 controls the light emission intensity of the effect button 25 so as to increase the decorativeness, so that the fanfare effect, the round effect, etc. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

[Specific example of a mode in which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a specific example of a mode in which the production button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect button 25 that enters the field of view of the player.

In FIG. 55, the luminous mode of the effect button 25 is displayed in black so that the reflection in the glass frame 15 is easy to understand.

When the LED 25c of the production button 25 emits light, the player's eyes receive direct light from the production button 25 indicated by the solid line arrow in FIG. 55 and reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 indicated by the broken line arrow.

A performance button 25 reflected in a glass frame 15 by reflected light entering the player's eyes.
The player can visually recognize the virtual image of . Therefore, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with board elements such as the life nail 36b attached to the game board 30 behind the glass frame 15. Visibility is likely to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under predetermined conditions (for example, when starting hitting to the right and returning to hitting to the left). In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED25c of the production|presentation button 25 light-extinguish.

According to this aspect, the virtual image of the production button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be made thinner, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the production button 25 appears to overlap the board element. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the visibility of the board element.

[Modified example of reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the effect button]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining a region where the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 before and after the movement of the effect button 25 in the modification according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a modification according to the second embodiment. Effect button 25 reflected behind glass frame 15 before and after movement of example effect button 25
is a diagram for explaining a region where a player can visually recognize a virtual image of . It should be noted that in the drawings below, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the effect button 25 and the like in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in this modification, the effect button 25 can be moved, for example, from the initial position so that the upper part thereof is tilted toward the player.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is tilted obliquely as shown in the positions after movement in FIGS. nail 3
It goes into the glass frame 15 at the position overlapping with 6b.

The incident angle of the light emitted from the production button 25 after the movement with respect to the glass frame 15 is smaller than that at the initial position. The amount (intensity) of light directed to the rear of the glass frame 15, that is, the glass frame 15, decreases (becomes weaker). In addition, corresponding to the decrease in the incident angle, the direction of the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 also becomes closer to the glass frame 15, and goes toward the region B above the player's head.

As a result, the player moves the life nail 3 from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face and head).
6b, the virtual image of the production button 25 can be avoided from overlapping the life nail 36b.
Since the visibility of 6b is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (above the normal position of the player's head), as shown in FIG. A virtual image (after movement (virtual image)) of the tilted effect button 25 appears to overlap the life nail 36b. However, since the area B is located above the normal position of the player's head, the player must stand up to look into the glass frame 15 from above.
The virtual image 5 does not appear to be superimposed, and it is possible to avoid deterioration in the visibility of the life nail 36b in a normal seated state.

Also, the game machine 10 is provided with a decoration device 18a projecting forward from the upper center of the glass frame 15 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, by locating the region B inside the decoration device 18a, the head of the player who tries to look in comes into contact with the decoration device 18a, the glass frame 15, etc., and cannot be seen unless he takes an unreasonable posture. , the virtual image of the performance button 25 can be substantially made invisible. By positioning the area B inside the decoration device 18a, the light emission of the production button 25 is reflected, so that the decorativeness of the decoration device 18a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the amount of light directed toward the glass frame 15 is reduced by the forward inclination of the effect button 25, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 26b from the area B, the visibility of the life nail 36b is deteriorated. can be suppressed.

[Mode of movement of effect button in second modification]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the movement mode of the effect button 25 of the second modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the effect button 25 of the second modification includes a lever portion (lever stick, joystick). Note that the grip portion 25d
is provided with an LED 25c (not shown) capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the shaft portion 25e can tilt forward, backward, left and right while supporting the grip portion 25d. It is acceptable.

It should be noted that the grip portion 25d and the shaft portion 25e may be configured to be movable downward, and a push input operation of pressing the effect button 25 from above toward the upper tray unit may be accepted.

By configuring the effect button 25 in this way, it is possible to move the LED 25c of the grip portion 25d and change the light emitting direction (angle). Therefore, FIG.
6 and FIG. 57 in which the whole production button 25 is tilted obliquely, the production button 25 of the second modified example can improve the visibility of the life nail 36b and improve the interest of the game. can be done.

[Movement mode of effect button in the third modification]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the movement mode of the effect button 25 of the third modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), the effect button 25 of the third modification is configured as a lever portion including a grip portion 25d and a shaft portion 25e, and can move left and right on the upper tray unit. An escape groove is formed in the upper plate unit so that the performance button 25 can move left and right.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the performance button 25 can be moved left and right along the escape groove of the upper tray unit. In the example of FIG. 59(B), the effect button 25 has moved to the left of the upper tray unit.

By constructing the effect button 25 in this way, the effect button 25 can be moved to a position not overlapping the life nail 36b, thereby improving the visibility of the life nail 36b, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

[Fourth modified example of reflection in the glass frame of the effect button]
FIG. 60 shows an area in which the effect button 25 of the fourth modification according to the second embodiment is reflected in the glass frame 15 and an area in which the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15.
It is a figure explaining.

As shown in FIG. 60, in this modified example, the case where the stage portion 40b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appear to overlap will be described.

The stage portion 40b has an LED or the like (not shown) capable of emitting light, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to the effect, game state, or the like. The distance from the player-side end of each board member (stage portion 40b, life nail 36b, start winning opening 36) to the cover glass 14 is the stage portion 40b,
The start winning opening 36 and the life nail 36b are shortened in order (stage section 40b>start winning opening 36>life nail 36b (see FIG. 60)). In addition, the distance from the edge of each board member to the cover glass 14 may be shortened in the order of the stage portion 40b, the life nail 36b, and the starting prize opening 36 (the stage portion 40
b> life nail 36b> start winning opening 36).

In addition, the effect button 25 has an LED 25c and is configured to be capable of emitting light, and part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 to the glass frame 15 is reflected by the glass frame 15,
(Player's side). When the player visually recognizes the stage portion 40b from the area A, the virtual image of the effect button 25 (effect button (virtual image)) appears to overlap the stage portion 40b as indicated by the dashed line in FIG.

Here, when the luminous intensity of the stage portion 40b is equal to or higher than the luminous intensity of the effect button 25, even if the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage portion 40b, the player cannot see the stage portion. 40b is relatively easy to visually recognize. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 emits light, the player can easily follow the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b and enjoy the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

On the other hand, when the luminescence intensity of the stage portion 40b is less than the luminescence intensity of the effect button 25, when the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage portion 40b, the stage portion 40b is visible. sexuality worsens.

Therefore, the effect control device 300, when a predetermined condition (for example, when returning from right-handed to left-handed due to a change in the game state or when the number of reservations is reduced to 2 or less) LED25 of the production button 25
By weakening the emission intensity of c, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15 . As a result, deterioration of the visibility of the stage portion 40b can be suppressed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED25c of the production|presentation button 25 light-extinguish.

In addition, since the light emission intensity of the stage part 40b is stronger than that of the production button 25, even if the amount of light of the production button 25 is small, the light from the stage part 40b with a large amount of light can be emitted to the production button 25.
The light emission of the production button 25 can be supplemented by reflecting the light. As a result, the light from the stage portion 40b can be used as a supplement to illuminate the effect button 25 while suppressing the intensity of light emitted from the effect button 25, so that the light from the effect button 25 reflected by the glass frame 15 can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the virtual image of the effect button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15 and the visibility of the stage part 40b to be deteriorated.

[Protruding production unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the structure of the projection effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 shows the projecting effect unit 1 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment.
3 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged.
The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device capable of executing a light emitting effect or the like according to the progress of the game.

An outer lens member 13 a
is arranged. A model character is drawn on the surface of the outer lens member 13a so as to be visible to a player who passes from the right side to the left side of the gaming machine 1, for example. It should be noted that the name of the game machine maker or the name of the game machine may be drawn.

Inside the projecting effect unit 13, substantially parallel to the game board 30, a plurality of outside LEDs 13b
(e.g. 6) and inner LEDs 13c (e.g. 14) are provided and configured as part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4). In addition, LED1 for the outside
3b and the inner LED 13c are arranged on the side light emitting substrate 13d, but may be arranged separately. Further, the outer LED 13b is an LE that is arranged substantially parallel to the outer lens member 13a.
A D panel may be used.

An outer lens member 13a, a light guide plate 13e,
A side base member 13f and an inner lens member 13g are provided, and a cover member 13h is further provided to cover the periphery of these members.

The light guide plate 13e is arranged substantially vertically in front of the outer LEDs 13b of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and diffuses the light of the outer LEDs 13b taken in from the rear end surface to uniformly emit surface light.
The outer lens member 13a can be illuminated with a constant illuminance.

The side base member 13f is arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 13e, and the adjacent surface faces the light guide plate 13e.
is fitted. Also, the side base member 13f is integrated with the inner lens member 13g. The side base member 13f functions as a reflector that refracts forward light from the inner LED 13c and changes it to leftward light. illuminated.

[Concrete example of a mode in which the projecting production unit is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of a mode in which the production button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the projecting effect unit 13 that enters the field of view of the player. In FIG. 62, the mode in which the projecting effect unit 13 emits light is displayed in black.

When the protruding effect unit 13 emits light, the player's eyes see direct light from the protruding effect unit 13 indicated by the solid line arrow in FIG. 62 and reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) indicated by the broken line arrow. enters.

The player visually recognizes the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 by the reflected light entering the player's eyes. Therefore, the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap board elements such as the life nail 36b in the glass frame 15, and visibility of the board elements tends to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the emission intensity of the inner LED 13c of the protruding effect unit 13 under predetermined conditions (for example, when starting hitting to the right and returning to hitting to the left). In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED13c for inside of the protrusion production|presentation unit 13 light-extinguish.

According to this aspect, the virtual image of the protruding effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be made thinner, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the protruding effect unit 13 overlaps with the board element. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the board element from being deteriorated even when the board element is visible.

Further, as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. 62, part of the light from the projection effect unit 13 is reflected by the effect button 25 so that it enters the player's field of view, thereby assisting the light emission of the effect button 25. may In this way, by using the reflected light of the projecting production unit 13 in the production button 25, it is possible to suppress the virtual image of the production button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15 by weakening the light emission of the LED 25c. deterioration of visibility can be suppressed.

[Concrete example of a mode in which the projecting production unit is reflected in the glass frame]
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the game board 30 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 which are within the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIG. 63, the starting prize-winning port 36 can be provided with an LED capable of emitting light according to the effect, game state, prize-winning, etc., in the same manner as the stage section 40b.

In addition, the game board 30 is configured as a part of the upper effect unit 40c or the side effect unit 40d, and the rear side of the cover glass 14 (back side, game board) from the initial position accommodated in the game board 30 according to the effect. 30 side) and substantially in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 40f is attached. The movable accessory 40f has a reflecting member (which may be metal-plated) capable of reflecting light incident from below forward (toward the player side). The reflecting member may be slanted, for example, facing forward and downward in order to facilitate forward reflection of light incident from below.

Here, the light emitted from the LEDs of the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 not only directly enters the player's eyes, but also can illuminate the surroundings of the game board 30 as shown in FIG.

For example, the light from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the surface of the effect button 25 and reaches the eyes of the player. Therefore, the luminous effect of the effect button 25 can be effectively performed while suppressing the luminous intensity of the effect button 25 and suppressing the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15.例文帳に追加

Also, the light from the stage part 40b and the starting prize opening 36 is reflected by the reflecting member of the movable accessory 40f that moves behind the cover glass 14 and substantially in front of the display device 41, and becomes reflected light that reaches the eyes of the player. can also Therefore, even if the movable accessory 40f does not have an LED, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable accessory 40f looks like it emits light. can improve the interest of

In the above description, the virtual image of the frame element (constituent member of the glass frame 15) reflected in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) is prevented from overlapping the board element, thereby degrading the visibility of the board element. restrained.

However, it is also possible to increase the presentation effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element. For example, the effect control device 300 causes the decorative member provided on the right side of the game board 30, such as the projecting effect unit 13, to emit light when hitting to the right, and the game area 32
By reflecting a virtual image of the decorative member on the right side of the ball, the player can be suggested to hit right. At that time, the production control device 300, for example, the projecting production unit 13 (frame element)
is illuminated in rainbow colors, the body (board element) of the side effect unit 40d may also be illuminated in rainbow colors, and the synergistic effect may make it easier for the player to understand the suggestion to hit to the right.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, for example, when causing the projecting effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) to emit yellow light, also sets the body part (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to blue, which is a complementary color to yellow. The white light may be seen to be inconspicuous by emitting light to reduce the apparent glare of the light emission when suggesting the player to hit right.

Further, the effect control device 300 may cause the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit green light at the same time when the protruding effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) emit red light. In this way, the light emitted by the frame element (red), which is different from the color of the board element (red), is reflected and superimposed (red + green) on the light emitted by the board element (green). It is also possible to create an area that looks yellow by changing the color of the board element and the frame element, thereby improving the decorativeness of the panel element and the frame element.

In addition, the effect control device 300 moves the effect button 25 from the position after movement such as FIG. By doing so, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 may be deliberately overlapped with the board elements such as the life nail 36b. According to this aspect, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b, and the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the usual, so that it is unexpected. occurs, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the player finishes hitting to the right (when returning to hitting to the left), a virtual image of the decoration member is reflected on the left side of the game area 32, so that the player can be suggested to hit to the left. Furthermore, the opening and closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 that opens the big winning opening, the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the normal figure start gate 34 (pounding gate), etc. are made to reflect the virtual image of the decorative member, You may suggest a game to According to this aspect, it is possible to perform an optical presentation using reflected light even on a member such as the opening/closing door 39c where it is difficult to attach the LED, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of

Note that the production control device 300 can increase the production effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element.
When displaying information, suggestions, or alerts such as "Illegal monitoring (equipped with magnetic/radio sensor, etc.)", "Spec display (display of probability of big hits and number of prize balls)", and "Prevention of addiction" on the display screen of However, the position of the frame element can be controlled so that the virtual image of the frame element (effect button 25, etc.) is not reflected in the display portion.

[Example of timing chart when executing a variable display game]
FIG. 64 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game).

When the variable display game is executed at time (A) in FIG. 64, on the display screen of the display device 41,
Decoration special patterns (decoration first patterns A to C, large patterns) and decoration second patterns (small patterns) are variably displayed.

Before and after the time (A), that is, before and after the start of the variable display game, the effect control device 300 changes the LED of the board decoration device 46 as a board element and the L of the frame decoration device 18 as a frame element.
The emission intensity of the ED is weakened. Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are illuminated relatively weakly by the board element and the frame element.

At time (B), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41 . Effect 1 is the first effect of effects composed of a plurality of continuous single effects (for example, effects 1 to 3) such as pseudo-continuous effects and step-up notices.

Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a pseudo-variation (single effect, Sub-effect, sub-variation) is performed continuously for a predetermined number of times.

It should be noted that, during the pseudo-stop display, the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect may be stop-displayed. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect is such that the pseudo-variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times ( Multiple times) may be produced to make it look like it is being executed. At that time, the production control device 300
, by displaying, for example, "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41 even when the temporary stop display is not performed, it is possible to perform an effect as if a transition to the next pseudo-fluctuation occurs.

The step-up notice is an effect in which a single effect (secondary effect) set in multiple stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

The pseudo-continuous performance and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of continuous single performances, and the more the plurality of times, the higher the expectation of a big win.

Also, at time (B), the effect control device 300 performs the frame decoration device 18 (
frame element) is changed from weak to strong. Therefore, the virtual image of the frame element such as the production button 25 is strongly reflected in the glass frame 15 and clearly overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b. Thus, the effect control device 300 can emphasize that the effect is executed by clearly reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the initial stage (effect 1) of the effect in the variable display game.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 maintains the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) at low level.

At time (C), when the effect 1 ends, the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element into the glass frame 15 is reduced, and the visibility of the board element such as the life nail 36b is improved. It should be noted that if the effect 1 is a pseudo-variation, here, the decorative special pattern on the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner.

Therefore, after the middle stage of the effect (after effect 1) in the variable display game, in which the player is highly likely to carefully determine whether or not the starting memory accumulates to the upper limit (for example, 4), the frame element emits light. Since the visibility of the board element is improved by weakening, the player who is considering the stopping shot can easily observe the game ball entering the starting prize winning port 36 and the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b above it. Since the game can be played efficiently, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the visibility of the display screen of the display device 41 behind the cover glass 14 is also improved, it becomes easier for the player to see the reserved display of the display screen and the effect itself, and the interest in the game can be improved. When changing the emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak, even if the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) is moved from the initial position so that the reflection of the virtual image does not overlap. good.

Next, at time (D) when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the end of the production 1, the production control device 300 extinguishes the frame decoration device 18 (frame element). Therefore, since the visibility of the board element, the game ball, and the display screen of the display device 41 becomes higher after the middle stage of the effect in the variable display game, the interest in the game can be improved.

At time (E), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 2 following the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41 . Effect 2 is the second effect of effects composed of a plurality of continuous single effects (eg, effects 1 to 3). In addition, the effect control device 300 can perform the pseudo-variation of the effect 2 so as to have the same pseudo-variation time (suggestive effect, advance notice effect time) as the effect 1.

Also, at time (E), the effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been in the off state in accordance with the effect 2 . Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated in accordance with the execution of the performance 2 compared to the case where the frame element is in the off state, so that the performance of the performance 2 can be emphasized. Since the luminescence intensity of the frame element is low, the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected in the glass frame 15 more than necessary, and the execution of the effect 2 can be emphasized.

After that, when the production 2 ends, the production control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) again.

Also, the effect control device 300 executes the effect 3 as the third effect of the effect composed of a plurality of single effects on the display screen of the display device 41 . The production control device 300 includes a production 3
, the emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been in the off state is changed to be weak. Therefore, similarly to the production 2, the production control device 300 can emphasize the execution of the production 3 without excessively reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15. - 特許庁

Subsequently, when the production 3 ends at time (F), the production control device 300 controls the frame decoration device 18 (
frame element) is turned off, and the board decoration device 46 (board element) is also turned off (flaring off). Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened. In this way, the effect control device 300 turns off the light before executing the SP ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, so that the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened, and the mode is different from the normal effect, resulting in unexpectedness. is generated, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation and improve the amusement of the game.

At time (G), the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect on the display screen of the display device 41 . At that time, the effect control device 300, the board decoration device 46 (
board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) are increased. Therefore, since the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated, execution of the SP ready-to-win effect can be emphasized.

At time (G), the luminous intensity of the frame element increases, and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 becomes intense. Brightness can be emphasized, and flashy production can be performed to enhance the production effect. That is, in the second half of the effect in the variable display game when the starting memory tends to accumulate to the upper limit (for example, 4), the player who is stopping the game does not observe the game balls around the starting winning opening 36, the stage part 40b, etc. Therefore, even if the virtual image of the frame element is intensely reflected in the glass frame 15, the performance effect of the SP ready-to-play performance can be enhanced without affecting the game performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The luminous intensity of the frame decoration device 18 is high, and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is emphasized. so
The visibility of the board elements does not deteriorate more than necessary, and the player can also observe the board elements.

After that, when the SP ready-to-win effect ends at time (H), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the end of the SP ready-to-win effect by visually recognizing that the luminous intensity of the board element and the frame element becomes weak when the SP ready-to-win effect on the display screen ends.

Note that, when emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, the effect control device 300 may not only increase the light emission intensity but also emphasize the reflection by blinking. In addition, the effect control device 300 changes the color of the frame element's luminous color according to the degree of expectation of the big win, thereby changing the color of the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win. good too.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300, in addition to the SP reach effect described above, the effect of emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, when the big win pattern is stopped, during the fanfare effect, during the ending effect, right It can be executed when hitting, when hitting back to the left, and so on. In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped, the specific area 86 (V winning opening) and the normal pattern start gate 34 (pounding gate)
For example, an effect may be performed in which the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is emphasized and reflected. In this way, the production control device 300 controls the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 in accordance with the game, so that each production effect can be enhanced and the player can be suggested how to play. .

Further, in the above timing chart, the effect control device 300 controls the luminous intensity of the frame element and the board element during the effect in one variable display game, and reflects the virtual image of the frame element into the glass frame 15. Although the effect of letting the player win is performed, the effect may be performed over a plurality of times of the variable display game.

For example, the effect control device 300 is a continuous notice (chance notice), which is an effect of displaying a decorative special pattern out of a common mode over a plurality of variable display games, or during standby (before digestion).
When executing a pre-reading notice that foretells the expectation of a big hit in the starting memory related to the suspension of the glass frame 1
An effect can be performed in which a virtual image of the frame element is reflected in 5.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game) and effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing effects related to the game. Effect control device 300), and when the result of the game is a special result (big win), a special game state (big win game, big win state) advantageous to the player can be generated.
The game machine 10 includes a transparent member (
For example, a cover glass 14), a frame element (a production button 25, a protruding production unit 13, a frame decoration device 18, etc.) arranged around a transparent member and capable of emitting light according to the production executed by the production control means, and a game board. Board elements arranged in 30 (life nail 36b, start winning opening 36, stage part 40b
, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and is subject to predetermined conditions (when automatically moving in response to the player's operation or performance, when starting right-handed or returning to left-handed, when the player In the case of manual operation of ), the virtual image of the frame element does not overlap.

According to such a game machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member can be prevented from overlapping the board element, and the visibility of the board element is improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frame element moves from an initial position where it overlaps the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member to a position where it does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element (front, back, front) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. tilted position, lateral).

According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member from overlapping the board element due to the physical movement of the frame element. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) formed on the front surface of the gaming board 30 so that the gaming board 30 can be visually recognized, and an effect control device provided around the transparent member. A frame element (production button 25, projecting production unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) that can emit light according to the production executed by the means (production control device 300), and a board element (life nail) arranged on the game board 30 36b, starting prize-winning port 36, stage part 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and a predetermined condition (
At the time of right hitting, at the end of right hitting) is established, it overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element.

According to such a game machine 10, since the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member is intentionally superimposed on the board element when a predetermined condition is established, unexpectedness is generated and the performance effect can be enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to suggest a game (suggestion of how to play), and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by reflecting a virtual image of the frame element on the board element where it is difficult to provide a light emitting member (LED), an optical performance using reflected light can be performed, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced. , can improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the board element (movable accessory) starts from an initial position (accommodated position within the game board 30) that does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is displaceable (operable, movable) to a position overlapping the virtual image of the frame element (behind the transparent member). Alternatively, the frame element (for example, the effect button 25) is moved from a position where the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member does not overlap the board element (for example, the position after movement in FIG. 53), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the frame element can be shifted to a position where the virtual image of overlaps the board element (for example, the initial position in FIG. 53) (operable,
movable).

According to such a game machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member overlaps with the board element, so that the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the usual, so that unexpectedness is generated and the amusement of the game is enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game), and effect control capable of executing effects related to the game. means (production control device 300); The gaming machine 10 includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10, and a first gaming machine configuration arranged in front of the gaming machine 10 from the transparent member and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner. Element (frame element (production button 2
5, protruding effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)), and second gaming machine components (board elements (dead nail 36b, start winning opening 36, stage part 40
b, a movable accessory 40f, a board decoration device 46, etc.)). The second gaming machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first gaming machine component reflected in the transparent member, and a predetermined condition (when automatically moving in response to the player's operation or performance, starting right hand hitting) In the case of returning to time, left-handed, or in the case of manual operation by the player), the virtual image of the first gaming machine component does not overlap.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the first gaming machine component (frame element) reflected in the transparent member
It is possible to avoid overlapping of the virtual image of the second game machine component (board element) and improve the visibility of the second game machine component, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes display means (the display device 4) capable of displaying a predetermined effect.
1 display screen), a transparent member (for example, cover glass 14) disposed in front of the game machine 10, and a first game that is disposed in front of the game machine 10 from the transparent member and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner. Machine components (frame elements (effect button 25, projecting effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) and second game machine components (board elements (dead nails 36b , a start winning port 36, a stage portion 40b, a movable accessory 40f, a board decoration device 46, etc.)). The second game machine component overlaps the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected in the transparent member, and does not overlap the virtual image of the first game machine component when a predetermined condition (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) is established. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a specific effect (for example, effects 2 and 3 (second and third pseudo-continuous effect single effects)) on the display means when a predetermined condition is established.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the first gaming machine component (frame element) reflected in the transparent member
Since the specific effect is executed in a state where the virtual image of is not overlapped with the second game machine component (board element),
Visibility of the components of the second game machine and the display means is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when a frame element or a board element has a specific light emission mode, an image notifying that it is in a specific light emission mode is displayed at a position where the virtual image of the frame element does not appear (for example, area A to area B in FIG. 53). display area (display area on the display screen of the display device 41, display area of other board elements or frame elements) in an area other than the glass frame 15, a position shifted from the front such as the right side or the upper right part of the glass frame 15 can be In this way, by displaying the image notifying the specific light emission mode at a position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (position where it does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element), the player can easily gaze at the image. Therefore, even if reflection occurs, the player's line of sight can be diverted to another location (the display device 41 as a board element or another board element or frame element) away from the virtual image of the frame element, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of

Also, in order to make it difficult to see that the frame element is reflected, the board element or the light-emitting members arranged near the board element may have the same or the same color as the frame element. For example, if the luminescence mode of the frame element is a cyclic luminescence mode in which colors are switched, the luminescence mode of the board element can also be a cyclic luminescence mode. At that time, the effect control device 300 may make the player easily recognize which light is emitted by making the color and the speed of circulation different as the cyclic light emission modes of the frame element and the board element. In addition, the continuation of the lighting mode of the frame element may be executed by the lighting mode of the board element or the lighting mode of the light-emitting member near the board element, and a series of effects may be executed using the reflection ( A natural presentation may be performed, or the frame element may continue the lighting mode of the board element).

Furthermore, the shape of the board element and the frame element can be various shapes. For example, when the board element is circular and the frame element is semicircular, even if the frame element is reflected on the circular board element, it can be made inconspicuous by overlapping with the light emission of the circular board element. Also, the virtual image of the frame element may be made relatively inconspicuous by making the light emission mode of the board element more conspicuous than the frame element by setting the light emission mode of the board element to rainbow color, high-speed cyclic lighting, or the like. Furthermore, the production control device 300
On the display screen of the display device 41, a display (for example, effect) corresponding to the board element may be displayed in the vicinity of the board element (for example, the lower right corner of the display screen) to make the board element stand out.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special Variable Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 50 Collective Display Device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
633b Decorative objects

Claims (1)

A control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of first pattern objects on a display device is provided, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated. In gaming machines,
a transparent member formed on the front surface of the game board so that the game board can be visually recognized;
a first gaming machine component disposed around the transparent member and capable of emitting light;
and a second game machine component arranged on the game board,
The variable display game includes a preliminary motion display period for displaying a preliminary motion for starting the variable display game, and a high-speed variable display period in which the variable speed is faster than the variable speed of the preliminary motion display period,
The control means is
capable of displaying a pending object corresponding to a starting memory as an execution right of the variable display game;
variably displaying the first pattern object and variably displaying a second pattern object smaller than the first pattern object;
making the size of the first symbol object during the preliminary action display period different from the size during the high-speed fluctuation display period;
setting the direction of movement of the first pattern object during the preliminary action display period to be different from the predetermined direction of the first pattern object during the high-speed fluctuation display period;
in both the preliminary action display period and the high-speed fluctuation display period, the variable display by the second symbol object is displayed ;
Furthermore, it is possible to display an effect according to the operation of the first game machine component,
The first game machine component can be manually operated, and the light emitting unit can be in a specific mode after the manual operation,
The second game machine component overlaps the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected in the transparent member, and the virtual image of the first game machine component is generated by manually operating the first game machine component. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to prevent overlapping with .

Images